You are on page 1of 733

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

V100R007

Hardware Description

Issue 02
Date 2007-09-10
Part Number 31401357

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1


1 Equipment Structure.................................................................................................................1-1
2 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Cabinet Type...................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Cabinet Configuration.....................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicator....................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 DC PDU.................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3 Other Configuration...............................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................................2-5

3 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Slot Allocation.................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Technical Specifications...............................................................................................................................3-17

4 Board List and Classification...................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards..........................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Description of the Barcode on the Board........................................................................................................4-3
4.3 Board Classification........................................................................................................................................4-4
4.3.1 SDH Processing Boards.........................................................................................................................4-4
4.3.2 PDH Processing Boards.........................................................................................................................4-6
4.3.3 Data Processing Boards..........................................................................................................................4-7
4.3.4 Interface Boards and Switching Boards.................................................................................................4-9
4.3.5 Cross-Connect Boards and SCC Boards..............................................................................................4-10
4.3.6 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................4-10
4.3.7 WDM Processing Boards.....................................................................................................................4-11
4.3.8 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Board.........................................................4-11
4.3.9 Power Interface Boards........................................................................................................................4-12

5 SDH Processing Boards............................................................................................................5-1


5.1 SL1..................................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................5-4

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................5-5


5.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................5-7
5.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................5-8
5.1.6 Board Feature Code................................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.7 Board Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................5-9
5.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................5-9
5.2 SLQ1.............................................................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-12
5.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-13
5.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-15
5.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-16
5.2.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-17
5.2.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-17
5.3 SLO1.............................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-20
5.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-22
5.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-24
5.3.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................5-24
5.3.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-24
5.3.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-25
5.4 SLT1..............................................................................................................................................................5-26
5.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-26
5.4.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-26
5.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-27
5.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-29
5.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-31
5.4.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-31
5.4.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-31
5.5 SEP1..............................................................................................................................................................5-32
5.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-33
5.5.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-33
5.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-34
5.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-37
5.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-39
5.5.6 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................5-39
5.5.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-40
5.5.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-41
5.6 SL4................................................................................................................................................................5-41

ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

5.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-42


5.6.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-42
5.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-43
5.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-45
5.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-47
5.6.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................5-47
5.6.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-48
5.6.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-48
5.7 SLD4.............................................................................................................................................................5-49
5.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-50
5.7.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-50
5.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-51
5.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-53
5.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-55
5.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................5-55
5.7.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-56
5.7.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-56
5.8 SLQ4.............................................................................................................................................................5-57
5.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-58
5.8.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-58
5.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-59
5.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-61
5.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-63
5.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................5-63
5.8.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-63
5.8.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-63
5.9 SL16..............................................................................................................................................................5-64
5.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-65
5.9.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................5-66
5.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-67
5.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-69
5.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-70
5.9.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................5-70
5.9.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-71
5.9.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-71
5.10 SL16A.........................................................................................................................................................5-73
5.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-73
5.10.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................5-74
5.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-75
5.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-77
5.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-79
5.10.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................5-79

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

5.10.7 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................5-79


5.10.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................5-79
5.11 SF16............................................................................................................................................................5-81
5.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-81
5.11.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................5-81
5.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-83
5.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-85
5.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-86
5.11.6 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................5-86
5.11.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................5-86

6 PDH Processing Boards............................................................................................................6-1


6.1 PL1..................................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................6-4
6.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.6 Board Feature Code................................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.7 Board Configuration Reference............................................................................................................. 6-7
6.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.2 PD1 .................................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-10
6.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-13
6.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-13
6.2.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................6-14
6.2.7 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-15
6.2.8 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-17
6.2.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-17
6.3 PQ1................................................................................................................................................................6-18
6.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-18
6.3.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-19
6.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-20
6.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-22
6.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-23
6.3.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................6-24
6.3.7 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-24
6.3.8 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-26
6.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-26
6.4 PQM .............................................................................................................................................................6-27
6.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-27

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

6.4.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-27


6.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-28
6.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-30
6.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-31
6.4.6 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-32
6.4.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-34
6.4.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-34
6.5 PL3................................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-35
6.5.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-36
6.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-36
6.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-39
6.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-40
6.5.6 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-40
6.5.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-42
6.5.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-42
6.6 PL3A.............................................................................................................................................................6-43
6.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-43
6.6.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-44
6.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-45
6.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-47
6.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-48
6.6.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-48
6.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-48
6.7 PD3................................................................................................................................................................6-49
6.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-50
6.7.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-50
6.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-51
6.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-53
6.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-54
6.7.6 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-55
6.7.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-56
6.7.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-57
6.8 PQ3................................................................................................................................................................6-57
6.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-58
6.8.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-58
6.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-58
6.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-61
6.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-62
6.8.6 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-62
6.8.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-64
6.8.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-64

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

6.9 DX1...............................................................................................................................................................6-64
6.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-65
6.9.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................6-65
6.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-66
6.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-67
6.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-68
6.9.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................6-68
6.9.7 TPS Protection for the Board...............................................................................................................6-69
6.9.8 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................6-70
6.9.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................6-70
6.10 DXA............................................................................................................................................................6-71
6.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-71
6.10.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................6-72
6.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-72
6.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-73
6.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-74
6.10.6 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................6-75
6.10.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................6-75
6.11 SPQ4............................................................................................................................................................6-75
6.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................6-76
6.11.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................6-76
6.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................6-77
6.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................6-80
6.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................6-81
6.11.6 TPS Protection for the Board.............................................................................................................6-82
6.11.7 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................6-83
6.11.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................6-83

7 Data Processing Boards.............................................................................................................7-1


7.1 EFT4................................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................7-4
7.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................7-8
7.1.6 Board Configuration Reference............................................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.2 EFT8................................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................7-9
7.2.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................7-9
7.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-10
7.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-12
7.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-14

vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

7.2.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-15


7.2.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-15
7.3 EFT8A...........................................................................................................................................................7-15
7.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-16
7.3.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-16
7.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-17
7.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-19
7.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-21
7.3.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-22
7.3.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-22
7.4 EGT2.............................................................................................................................................................7-22
7.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-23
7.4.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-23
7.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-24
7.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-26
7.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-27
7.4.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................7-27
7.4.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-28
7.4.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-28
7.5 EFS0..............................................................................................................................................................7-29
7.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-29
7.5.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-30
7.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-32
7.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-35
7.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-36
7.5.6 TPS Protection......................................................................................................................................7-36
7.5.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-37
7.5.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-37
7.6 EFS4..............................................................................................................................................................7-37
7.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-38
7.6.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-38
7.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-40
7.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-43
7.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-45
7.6.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-45
7.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-45
7.7 EGS2.............................................................................................................................................................7-45
7.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-46
7.7.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-46
7.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-49
7.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-51
7.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-53

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

7.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................7-53


7.7.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-53
7.7.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-53
7.8 EMS4.............................................................................................................................................................7-54
7.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-55
7.8.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-55
7.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-57
7.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-60
7.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-62
7.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................7-62
7.8.7 Board Protection...................................................................................................................................7-63
7.8.8 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-65
7.8.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-66
7.9 EGS4.............................................................................................................................................................7-67
7.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-67
7.9.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................7-67
7.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-69
7.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-72
7.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-74
7.9.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................7-74
7.9.7 Board Protection...................................................................................................................................7-74
7.9.8 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-77
7.9.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-78
7.10 EGR2...........................................................................................................................................................7-79
7.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................7-79
7.10.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................7-79
7.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................7-82
7.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................7-84
7.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................7-86
7.10.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................7-86
7.10.7 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................7-86
7.10.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................7-86
7.11 EMR0..........................................................................................................................................................7-87
7.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................7-88
7.11.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................7-89
7.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................7-92
7.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................7-94
7.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................7-97
7.11.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................7-98
7.11.7 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................7-98
7.11.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................7-98
7.12 ADL4...........................................................................................................................................................7-99

viii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

7.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................7-100


7.12.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................7-100
7.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................7-101
7.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................7-103
7.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................7-104
7.12.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................7-104
7.12.7 Board Configuration Reference.......................................................................................................7-104
7.12.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................7-105
7.13 ADQ1........................................................................................................................................................7-106
7.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................7-106
7.13.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................7-106
7.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................7-107
7.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................7-109
7.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................7-111
7.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................7-111
7.13.7 Board Configuration Reference.......................................................................................................7-111
7.13.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................7-112
7.14 IDL4..........................................................................................................................................................7-113
7.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................7-113
7.14.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................7-113
7.14.3 Working Principle ...........................................................................................................................7-115
7.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................7-117
7.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................7-118
7.14.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................7-118
7.14.7 Board Protection...............................................................................................................................7-118
7.14.8 Board Configuration Reference.......................................................................................................7-119
7.14.9 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................7-119
7.15 IDQ1..........................................................................................................................................................7-120
7.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................7-120
7.15.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................7-121
7.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................7-122
7.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................7-124
7.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................7-126
7.15.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................7-126
7.15.7 Board Protection...............................................................................................................................7-126
7.15.8 Board Configuration Reference.......................................................................................................7-126
7.15.9 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................7-127
7.16 MST4.........................................................................................................................................................7-128
7.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................7-128
7.16.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................7-128
7.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................7-130
7.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................7-132

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

7.16.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................7-133


7.16.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................7-133
7.16.7 Board Configuration Reference.......................................................................................................7-134
7.16.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................7-134

8 Interface Boards and Switching Boards.................................................................................8-1


8.1 L12S................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................8-4
8.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-5
8.1.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................8-5
8.2 D12B...............................................................................................................................................................8-5
8.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-6
8.2.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................8-6
8.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-6
8.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................8-6
8.2.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-8
8.2.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................8-9
8.3 D12S................................................................................................................................................................8-9
8.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-9
8.3.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................8-9
8.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-9
8.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-10
8.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-12
8.3.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-13
8.4 L75S..............................................................................................................................................................8-13
8.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-13
8.4.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................8-13
8.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-14
8.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-14
8.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-15
8.4.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-15
8.5 D75S..............................................................................................................................................................8-16
8.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-16
8.5.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................8-16
8.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-16
8.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-17
8.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-19
8.5.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-20
8.6 D34S..............................................................................................................................................................8-20
8.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-20

x Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

8.6.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................8-20


8.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-21
8.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-21
8.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-22
8.6.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-23
8.7 C34S..............................................................................................................................................................8-23
8.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-24
8.7.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................8-24
8.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-24
8.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-25
8.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-26
8.7.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-26
8.8 EU04..............................................................................................................................................................8-27
8.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-27
8.8.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................8-27
8.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-27
8.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-28
8.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-29
8.8.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-30
8.9 EU08..............................................................................................................................................................8-30
8.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-31
8.9.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................8-31
8.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-31
8.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-32
8.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-33
8.9.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................8-33
8.10 OU08 ..........................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-34
8.10.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-35
8.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-35
8.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-35
8.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-38
8.10.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-38
8.11 MU04..........................................................................................................................................................8-39
8.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-39
8.11.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-39
8.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-39
8.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-40
8.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-41
8.11.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-42
8.12 TSB8............................................................................................................................................................8-42
8.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-43

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

8.12.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-43


8.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-43
8.12.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-44
8.12.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-45
8.12.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-46
8.13 EFF8............................................................................................................................................................8-46
8.13.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-47
8.13.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-47
8.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-47
8.13.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-48
8.13.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-49
8.13.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-50
8.14 ETF8............................................................................................................................................................8-51
8.14.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-51
8.14.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-51
8.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-51
8.14.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-52
8.14.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-54
8.14.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-55
8.15 ETS8............................................................................................................................................................8-56
8.15.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-56
8.15.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-56
8.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-56
8.15.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-57
8.15.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-59
8.15.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-59
8.16 DM12..........................................................................................................................................................8-60
8.16.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-60
8.16.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................8-60
8.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-60
8.16.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-61
8.16.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-64
8.16.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................8-64

9 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards..........................................................................9-1


9.1 CXL1...............................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Function and Feature..............................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-5
9.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................9-9
9.1.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-11
9.1.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................9-11
9.1.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-11

xii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

9.1.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-12


9.2 CXL4.............................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-14
9.2.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................9-14
9.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-17
9.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-20
9.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-22
9.2.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................9-22
9.2.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-22
9.2.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-23
9.3 CXL16...........................................................................................................................................................9-24
9.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-25
9.3.2 Function and Feature............................................................................................................................9-25
9.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-28
9.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-31
9.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-33
9.3.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................9-33
9.3.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-33
9.3.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-34

10 Auxiliary Boards.....................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 EOW............................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................10-2
10.1.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................10-3
10.1.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................10-5
10.1.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................10-5
10.2 AUX............................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................10-7
10.2.4 Jumper..............................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................10-15
10.3 AMU..........................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-15
10.3.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................10-15
10.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-16
10.3.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-17
10.3.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-20
10.3.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................10-20

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xiii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

10.4 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................10-21
10.4.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................10-21
10.4.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................10-21
10.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................10-22
10.4.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-22
10.4.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-23
10.4.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................10-23

11 WDM Processing Boards......................................................................................................11-1


11.1 CMR2..........................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................11-4
11.1.4 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................11-7
11.1.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................11-7
11.1.7 Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2 CMR4..........................................................................................................................................................11-9
11.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................11-9
11.2.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................11-9
11.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-10
11.2.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-11
11.2.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-13
11.2.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................11-13
11.2.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-14
11.3 MR2...........................................................................................................................................................11-15
11.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-16
11.3.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-16
11.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-16
11.3.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-17
11.3.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-19
11.3.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................11-19
11.3.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-20
11.4 MR2A........................................................................................................................................................11-21
11.4.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-21
11.4.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-21
11.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-23
11.4.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-24
11.4.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-25
11.4.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-25
11.5 MR2B........................................................................................................................................................11-26
11.5.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-27
11.5.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-27

xiv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

11.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-28


11.5.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-29
11.5.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-30
11.5.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-30
11.6 MR2C........................................................................................................................................................11-31
11.6.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-32
11.6.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-32
11.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-33
11.6.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-34
11.6.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-36
11.6.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-36
11.7 MR4...........................................................................................................................................................11-37
11.7.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-37
11.7.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-37
11.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-38
11.7.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-39
11.7.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-41
11.7.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................11-41
11.7.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-42
11.8 LWX..........................................................................................................................................................11-43
11.8.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-43
11.8.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-43
11.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-44
11.8.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-46
11.8.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-48
11.8.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................11-48
11.8.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-48
11.9 OBU1........................................................................................................................................................11-51
11.9.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................11-52
11.9.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................11-52
11.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-52
11.9.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-54
11.9.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-55
11.9.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................11-55
11.9.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................11-56
11.10 FIB...........................................................................................................................................................11-57
11.10.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................11-57
11.10.2 Function and Feature......................................................................................................................11-57
11.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...............................................................................................11-58
11.10.4 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................11-58
11.10.5 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................11-59
11.10.6 Technical Specifications................................................................................................................11-59

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xv


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

12 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards............................... 12-1


12.1 BA2............................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................12-3
12.1.4 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.1.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................12-7
12.1.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................12-7
12.1.7 Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2 BPA.............................................................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................12-9
12.2.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................12-9
12.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................12-10
12.2.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................12-11
12.2.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-13
12.2.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................12-13
12.2.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................12-13
12.3 COA..........................................................................................................................................................12-14
12.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................12-15
12.3.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................12-15
12.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................12-18
12.3.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................12-19
12.3.5 Installation Position..........................................................................................................................12-23
12.3.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................12-24
12.3.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................12-24

13 Power Interface Boards.........................................................................................................13-1


13.1 UPM............................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................13-3
13.1.4 Rear Panel.......................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.1.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................13-6
13.1.6 Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2 PIU.............................................................................................................................................................. 13-7
13.2.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................13-8
13.2.2 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................13-8
13.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................13-8
13.2.4 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.2.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-10
13.2.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................13-10
13.3 PIUA..........................................................................................................................................................13-11
13.3.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................13-11

xvi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Contents

13.3.2 Function and Feature........................................................................................................................13-11


13.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................13-12
13.3.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................13-13
13.3.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-14
13.3.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................13-14

14 Cables.......................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Fiber Jumper................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.1 Types of Fiber Jumpers......................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Connector...........................................................................................................................................14-3
14.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables..........................................................................................................14-5
14.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cable.......................................................................................14-5
14.2.2 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable......................................................14-7
14.2.3 UPM Power Cable..............................................................................................................................14-9
14.3 Alarm Cable..............................................................................................................................................14-10
14.3.1 Alarm Input/Output Cable................................................................................................................14-10
14.4 Management Cable....................................................................................................................................14-12
14.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable....................................................................................................................14-12
14.4.2 Serial 1–4/F1/F&f Serial Port Cable................................................................................................14-14
14.4.3 RS232/RS-422 Serial Port Cable.....................................................................................................14-15
14.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Wire.................................................................................................................14-17
14.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable...............................................................................................................14-18
14.4.6 Straight Through Cable....................................................................................................................14-19
14.4.7 Crossover Cable...............................................................................................................................14-20
14.5 Signal Cable..............................................................................................................................................14-21
14.5.1 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable........................................................................................................................14-22
14.5.2 75-ohm 16 x E1 Cable......................................................................................................................14-23
14.5.3 120-ohm 8 x E1 Cable......................................................................................................................14-26
14.5.4 120-ohm 16 x E1 Cable....................................................................................................................14-28
14.5.5 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable.........................................................................................................................14-30
14.5.6 Framed E1 Cable..............................................................................................................................14-31
14.5.7 N x 64 kbit/s Cables.........................................................................................................................14-31
14.6 Clock Cable...............................................................................................................................................14-48
14.6.1 Clock Cable......................................................................................................................................14-48
14.6.2 One-Channel and Two-Channel Clock Transfer Cables..................................................................14-50

A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.............................................................................A-1


A.1 Indicators on the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 Board Alarm Indicator...................................................................................................................................A-2

B Labels..........................................................................................................................................B-1
B.1 Safety Label...................................................................................................................................................B-2
B.1.1 Label Description..................................................................................................................................B-2
B.1.2 Label Position.......................................................................................................................................B-3

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xvii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Hardware Description

B.2 Optical Module Labels...................................................................................................................................B-5


B.3 Engineering Labels........................................................................................................................................B-7

C Power Consumption and Weight..........................................................................................C-1


D Board Version Configuration................................................................................................D-1
E Board Loopbacks.......................................................................................................................E-1
F Board Configuration Reference..............................................................................................F-1
F.1 SDH Processing Boards..................................................................................................................................F-2
F.2 PDH Processing Board...................................................................................................................................F-2
F.3 Data Processing Board....................................................................................................................................F-4
F.3.1 SDH Parameters.....................................................................................................................................F-5
F.3.2 Ethernet Parameters...............................................................................................................................F-6
F.3.3 ATM Parameter.....................................................................................................................................F-7
F.4 Cross-Connect and Timing Unit.....................................................................................................................F-8

G Glossary.....................................................................................................................................G-1
H Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................H-1
Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

xviii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A...............................................................................................1-1


Figure 1-2 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B...............................................................................................1-1
Figure 2-1 ETSI cabinet.......................................................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Appearance of the DC PDU...............................................................................................................2-4
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack......................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack......................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A..................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B..................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack...................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots..........................................3-5
Figure 3-7 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A..................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-8 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-9 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B..................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-10 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)......................................3-6
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)..............................3-7
Figure 4-1 Barcode of a board..............................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 5-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the SL1..........................................................................5-5
Figure 5-2 Front panel of the N1SL1/N2SL1......................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the R1SL1...................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLQ1.....................................................................5-13
Figure 5-5 Front panel of the N1SLQ1/N2SLQ1...............................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-6 Front panel of the R1SLQ1.............................................................................................................. 5-16
Figure 5-7 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLO1.....................................................................5-21
Figure 5-8 Front panel of the SLO1...................................................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-9 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLT1.....................................................................5-28
Figure 5-10 Front panel of the SLT1..................................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the SEP1................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-12 Block diagram for the working principle of the SEP used with the EU08.....................................5-35
Figure 5-13 Block diagram for the working principle of the SEP used with the OU08.................................... 5-36
Figure 5-14 Front panel of the SEP1..................................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-15 Principle of the TPS protection for the SEP1 ................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-16 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1...........................................................5-40
Figure 5-17 Block diagram for the working principle of the SL4......................................................................5-44

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xix


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Figures Hardware Description

Figure 5-18 Front panel of the N1SL4/N2SL4.................................................................................................. 5-46


Figure 5-19 Front panel of the R1SL4...............................................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-20 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLD4...................................................................5-52
Figure 5-21 Front panel of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4.............................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-22 Front panel of the R1SLD4............................................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-23 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLQ4...................................................................5-60
Figure 5-24 Front panel of the SLQ4.................................................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-25 Block diagram for the working principle of the SL16....................................................................5-67
Figure 5-26 Front panel of the SL16..................................................................................................................5-69
Figure 5-27 Block diagram for the working principle of the N1SL16A and N2SL16A....................................5-75
Figure 5-28 Block diagram for the working principle of the N3SL16A............................................................5-76
Figure 5-29 Front panel of the SL16A...............................................................................................................5-78
Figure 5-30 Block diagram for the working principle of the SF16....................................................................5-83
Figure 5-31 Front panel of the SF16..................................................................................................................5-85
Figure 6-1 Block diagram for the functions of the PL1.......................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-2 Block diagram of the E1 mapping/demapping...................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-3 Front panel of the PL1........................................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-4 Block diagram for the functions of the PD1.....................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-5 Block diagram of the E1 mapping/ demapping ...............................................................................6-11
Figure 6-6 Front panel of the PD1......................................................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-7 Principle of the TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack..............................6-15
Figure 6-8 Principle of the TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack..............................6-16
Figure 6-9 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack........6-16
Figure 6-10 Block diagram for the functions of the PQ1...................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-11 Block diagram of the E1/T1 mapping/ demapping ........................................................................6-21
Figure 6-12 Front panel of the PQ1....................................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-13 Principle of the TPS protection for the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack............................6-25
Figure 6-14 Slot configuration for 1:2 TPS protection of the PQ1....................................................................6-26
Figure 6-15 Block diagram for the functions of the PQM.................................................................................6-28
Figure 6-16 Block diagram of the E1/T1 mapping/ demapping ........................................................................6-29
Figure 6-17 Front panel of the PQM..................................................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-18 Principle of the TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack..........................6-33
Figure 6-19 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack....6-34
Figure 6-20 Block diagram for the functions of the PL3...................................................................................6-37
Figure 6-21 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping .........................................................................6-37
Figure 6-22 Front panel of the PL3....................................................................................................................6-39
Figure 6-23 Principle of the TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack............................6-41
Figure 6-24 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack......6-42
Figure 6-25 Block diagram for the functions of the PL3A................................................................................6-45
Figure 6-26 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping .........................................................................6-45
Figure 6-27 Front panel of the PL3A.................................................................................................................6-47
Figure 6-28 Block diagram for the functions of the PD3...................................................................................6-51

xx Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Figures

Figure 6-29 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping .........................................................................6-52


Figure 6-30 Front panel of the PD3....................................................................................................................6-54
Figure 6-31 Principle of the TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack............................6-55
Figure 6-32 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack......6-56
Figure 6-33 Block diagram for the functions of the PQ3...................................................................................6-59
Figure 6-34 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping .........................................................................6-59
Figure 6-35 Front panel of the PQ3....................................................................................................................6-61
Figure 6-36 Principle of the TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack............................6-62
Figure 6-37 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack......6-63
Figure 6-38 Block diagram for the functions of the DX1..................................................................................6-66
Figure 6-39 Front panel of the DX1...................................................................................................................6-67
Figure 6-40 Principle of the TPS protection for the DX1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...........................6-69
Figure 6-41 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the DX1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-70
Figure 6-42 Block diagram for the functions of the DXA................................................................................. 6-72
Figure 6-43 Front panel of the DXA..................................................................................................................6-74
Figure 6-44 Block diagram for the functions of the SPQ4.................................................................................6-77
Figure 6-45 Block diagram of the 140M mapping/demapping .........................................................................6-78
Figure 6-46 Block diagram of the SDH overhead processing module...............................................................6-78
Figure 6-47 Front panel of the SPQ4................................................................................................................. 6-81
Figure 6-48 Principle of the TPS protection for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack......................... 6-82
Figure 6-49 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4...........................................................6-83
Figure 7-1 Block diagram for the functions of the EFT4.....................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EFT4......................................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-3 Block diagram for the functions of the EFT8...................................................................................7-11
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EFT8....................................................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-5 Block diagram for the functions of the EFT8A................................................................................7-18
Figure 7-6 Front panel of the EFT8A.................................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-7 Block diagram for the functions of the EGT2..................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-8 Front panel of the EGT2...................................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-9 Block diagram for the functions of the EFS0...................................................................................7-33
Figure 7-10 Front panel of the EFS0..................................................................................................................7-35
Figure 7-11 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................7-37
Figure 7-12 Block diagram for the functions of the EFS4.................................................................................7-41
Figure 7-13 Front panel of the EFS4..................................................................................................................7-43
Figure 7-14 Block diagram for the functions of the EGS2................................................................................ 7-49
Figure 7-15 Front panel of the EGS2.................................................................................................................7-52
Figure 7-16 Block diagram for the functions of the EMS4................................................................................7-58
Figure 7-17 Front panel of the EMS4................................................................................................................ 7-61
Figure 7-18 Normal working of the EMS4........................................................................................................7-63
Figure 7-19 Principle of the BPS protection for the EMS4............................................................................... 7-64
Figure 7-20 Principle of the PPS protection for the EMS4................................................................................7-65

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxi


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Figures Hardware Description

Figure 7-21 Block diagram for the functions of the EGS4................................................................................7-70


Figure 7-22 Front panel of the EGS4.................................................................................................................7-73
Figure 7-23 Normal working of the EGS4.........................................................................................................7-75
Figure 7-24 Principle of the BPS protection for the EGS4................................................................................7-76
Figure 7-25 Principle of the PPS protection for the EGS4.................................................................................7-77
Figure 7-26 Block diagram for the functions of the EGR2................................................................................7-82
Figure 7-27 Front panel of the EGR2.................................................................................................................7-85
Figure 7-28 Block diagram for the functions of the EMR0...............................................................................7-92
Figure 7-29 Front panel of the N1EMR0...........................................................................................................7-95
Figure 7-30 Front panel of the N2EMR0...........................................................................................................7-96
Figure 7-31 Block diagram for the functions of the ADL4..............................................................................7-101
Figure 7-32 Front panel of the ADL4..............................................................................................................7-103
Figure 7-33 Block diagram for the functions of the ADQ1.............................................................................7-108
Figure 7-34 Front panel of the ADQ1..............................................................................................................7-110
Figure 7-35 Block diagram for the functions of the IDL4...............................................................................7-115
Figure 7-36 Front panel of the IDL4................................................................................................................7-117
Figure 7-37 Block diagram for the functions of the IDQ1...............................................................................7-123
Figure 7-38 Front panel of the IDQ1................................................................................................................7-125
Figure 7-39 Block diagram for the functions of the MST4..............................................................................7-130
Figure 7-40 Front panel of the MST4..............................................................................................................7-132
Figure 8-1 Block diagram for the functions of the L12S.....................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the L12S......................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 Block diagram for the functions of the D12B....................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-4 Front panel of the D12B.....................................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-5 Block diagram for the functions of the D12S...................................................................................8-10
Figure 8-6 Front panel of the D12S....................................................................................................................8-11
Figure 8-7 Block diagram for the functions of the L75S...................................................................................8-14
Figure 8-8 Front panel of the L75S....................................................................................................................8-15
Figure 8-9 Block diagram for the functions of the D75S...................................................................................8-17
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the D75S..................................................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-11 Block diagram for the functions of the D34S.................................................................................8-21
Figure 8-12 Front panel of the D34S..................................................................................................................8-22
Figure 8-13 Block diagram for the functions of the C34S.................................................................................8-24
Figure 8-14 Front panel of the C34S..................................................................................................................8-25
Figure 8-15 Block diagram for the functions of the EU04.................................................................................8-28
Figure 8-16 Front panel of the EU04.................................................................................................................8-29
Figure 8-17 Block diagram for the functions of the EU08.................................................................................8-31
Figure 8-18 Front panel of the EU08.................................................................................................................8-32
Figure 8-19 Block diagram for the functions of the OU08................................................................................8-35
Figure 8-20 Front panel of the N1OU08............................................................................................................8-36
Figure 8-21 Front panel of the N2OU08............................................................................................................8-37
Figure 8-22 Block diagram for the functions of the MU04................................................................................8-40

xxii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Figures

Figure 8-23 Front panel of the MU04................................................................................................................8-41


Figure 8-24 Block diagram for the functions of the TSB8.................................................................................8-43
Figure 8-25 Front panel of the TSB8.................................................................................................................8-44
Figure 8-26 Block diagram for the functions of the EFF8.................................................................................8-47
Figure 8-27 Front panel of the EFF8..................................................................................................................8-48
Figure 8-28 Block diagram for the functions of the ETF8.................................................................................8-52
Figure 8-29 Front panel of the ETF8..................................................................................................................8-53
Figure 8-30 Block diagram for the functions of the ETS8.................................................................................8-57
Figure 8-31 Front panel of the ETS8..................................................................................................................8-58
Figure 8-32 Block diagram for the functions of the DM12................................................................................8-61
Figure 8-33 Front panel of the DM12................................................................................................................8-62
Figure 9-1 Block diagram for the functions of the CXL1....................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-2 Block diagram of higher and lower order cross-connect modules....................................................9-9
Figure 9-3 Front panel of the CXL1...................................................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-4 Block diagram for the functions of the CXL4..................................................................................9-17
Figure 9-5 Block diagram of higher and lower order cross-connect modules..................................................9-20
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the CXL4...................................................................................................................9-21
Figure 9-7 Block diagram for the functions of the CXL16................................................................................9-28
Figure 9-8 Block diagram of higher and lower order cross-connect modules..................................................9-31
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the CXL16.................................................................................................................9-32
Figure 10-1 Block diagram for the functions of the EOW.................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Front panel of the EOW..................................................................................................................10-4
Figure 10-3 Block diagram for the functions of the R1AUX.............................................................................10-8
Figure 10-4 Block diagram for the functions of the R2AUX.............................................................................10-9
Figure 10-5 Position of J9 on the AUX............................................................................................................10-11
Figure 10-6 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................10-12
Figure 10-7 Block diagram for the functions of the AMU...............................................................................10-16
Figure 10-8 Positions of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame............................................................................10-17
Figure 10-9 Front panel of the AMU...............................................................................................................10-18
Figure 10-10 Connection of the cabinet alarm indicators................................................................................10-20
Figure 10-11 Block diagram for the functions of the FAN..............................................................................10-22
Figure 10-12 Front panel of the FAN...............................................................................................................10-23
Figure 11-1 Block diagram for the functions of the CMR2...............................................................................11-4
Figure 11-2 Front panel of the CMR2................................................................................................................11-6
Figure 11-3 Block diagram for the functions of the CMR4.............................................................................11-10
Figure 11-4 Front panel of the CMR4..............................................................................................................11-12
Figure 11-5 Block diagram for the functions of the MR2................................................................................11-17
Figure 11-6 Front panel of the MR2................................................................................................................11-18
Figure 11-7 MR2A used as the OTM station...................................................................................................11-22
Figure 11-8 MR2A and LWX used as the two-channel wavelength adding/dropping OADM station...........11-22
Figure 11-9 Block diagram for the functions of the MR2A.............................................................................11-23
Figure 11-10 Front panel of the MR2A............................................................................................................11-24

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxiii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Figures Hardware Description

Figure 11-11 MR2B used as the OTM station.................................................................................................11-27


Figure 11-12 MR2B and LWX used as the two-channel wavelength adding/dropping OADM station......... 11-28
Figure 11-13 Block diagram for the functions of the MR2B...........................................................................11-28
Figure 11-14 Front panel of the MR2B............................................................................................................11-29
Figure 11-15 MR2C used as the OTM station.................................................................................................11-32
Figure 11-16 Two-channel wavelength adding/dropping OADM station realized by the MR2C and LWX
...........................................................................................................................................................................11-33
Figure 11-17 Block diagram for the functions of the MR2C...........................................................................11-33
Figure 11-18 Front panel of the MR2C............................................................................................................11-35
Figure 11-19 Block diagram for the functions of the MR4..............................................................................11-38
Figure 11-20 Front panel of the MR4.............................................................................................................. 11-40
Figure 11-21 Block diagram for the functions of the LWX.............................................................................11-45
Figure 11-22 Front panel of the LWX..............................................................................................................11-47
Figure 11-23 Block diagram for the functions of the OBU1............................................................................11-53
Figure 11-24 Front panel of the OBU1............................................................................................................11-54
Figure 11-25 Location of the FIB in the optical transmission system............................................................. 11-57
Figure 11-26 Block diagram for the working principle of the FIB..................................................................11-58
Figure 11-27 Front panel of the FIB................................................................................................................ 11-59
Figure 12-1 Location of the BA in the optical transmission system..................................................................12-2
Figure 12-2 Block diagram for the functions of the BA2..................................................................................12-4
Figure 12-3 Front panel of the BA2...................................................................................................................12-6
Figure 12-4 Location of the BA and PA in the optical transmission system.....................................................12-9
Figure 12-5 Block diagram for the working principle of the BPA...................................................................12-10
Figure 12-6 Front panel of the BPA.................................................................................................................12-12
Figure 12-7 Appearance of the case-shaped 61COA and N1COA (PA)......................................................... 12-16
Figure 12-8 Appearance of the case-shaped 62COA.......................................................................................12-17
Figure 12-9 Application of the optical Raman amplifier (62COA).................................................................12-17
Figure 12-10 Block diagram for the functions of the 61COA and N1COA.................................................... 12-18
Figure 12-11 Front panel of the 61COA and N1COA.....................................................................................12-20
Figure 12-12 Front panel of the 62COA..........................................................................................................12-20
Figure 12-13 SC/PC fiber connector................................................................................................................12-21
Figure 12-14 E2000 flange and fiber connector...............................................................................................12-21
Figure 12-15 Position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet............................................................................... 12-24
Figure 13-1 Appearance of the power supply case............................................................................................13-2
Figure 13-2 Rear view of the UPM....................................................................................................................13-4
Figure 13-3 Block diagram for the functions of the PIU....................................................................................13-9
Figure 13-4 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................13-10
Figure 13-5 Block diagram for the functions of the PIUA...............................................................................13-12
Figure 13-6 Front panel of the PIUA............................................................................................................... 13-13
Figure 14-1 LC/PC optical connector................................................................................................................14-3
Figure 14-2 SC/PC optical connector.................................................................................................................14-4
Figure 14-3 FC/PC optical connector.................................................................................................................14-4
Figure 14-4 E2000/APC optical connector........................................................................................................14-5

xxiv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Figures

Figure 14-5 Cabinet –48 V power cable and BGND power grounding cable....................................................14-6
Figure 14-6 Cabinet PGND protection grounding cable (JG2)..........................................................................14-6
Figure 14-7 Cabinet PGND protection grounding cable (OT)...........................................................................14-6
Figure 14-8 Structure of the equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable..................................................................14-8
Figure 14-9 PGND power cable.........................................................................................................................14-8
Figure 14-10 Structure of the UPM power cable...............................................................................................14-9
Figure 14-11 Structure of the alarm input/output cable...................................................................................14-11
Figure 14-12 Structure of the OAM serial port cable.......................................................................................14-13
Figure 14-13 Structure of the Serial 1–4/F1/F&f serial port cable..................................................................14-14
Figure 14-14 Structure of the RS232/RS-422 serial port cable........................................................................14-16
Figure 14-15 Structure of the ordinary telephone wire....................................................................................14-17
Figure 14-16 Structure of the COA concatenating cable.................................................................................14-18
Figure 14-17 Structure of the straight through cable........................................................................................14-19
Figure 14-18 Structure of the crossover cable..................................................................................................14-20
Figure 14-19 Structure of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable.........................................................................................14-22
Figure 14-20 Structure of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable.......................................................................................14-24
Figure 14-21 Structure of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable.......................................................................................14-26
Figure 14-22 Structure of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable.....................................................................................14-28
Figure 14-23 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable..........................................................................................14-30
Figure 14-24 Structure of the V.35 DCE cable................................................................................................14-33
Figure 14-25 Structure of the V.35 DTE cable................................................................................................14-35
Figure 14-26 Structure of the V.24 DCE cable................................................................................................14-36
Figure 14-27 Structure of the V.24 DTE cable................................................................................................14-38
Figure 14-28 Structure of the X.21 DCE cable................................................................................................14-39
Figure 14-29 Structure of the X.21 DTE cable................................................................................................14-40
Figure 14-30 Structure of the RS449 DCE cable.............................................................................................14-42
Figure 14-31 Structure of the RS449 DTE cable.............................................................................................14-43
Figure 14-32 Structure of the RS530 DCE cable.............................................................................................14-45
Figure 14-33 Structure of the RS530 DTE cable.............................................................................................14-47
Figure 14-34 Structure of the 75-ohm clock cable...........................................................................................14-49
Figure 14-35 Structure of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable.......................................................................................14-49
Figure 14-36 Structure of the one-channel clock transfer cable (75 ohms to 120 ohms)................................14-50
Figure 14-37 Structure of the two-channel clock transfer cable (75 ohms to 120 ohms)................................14-50
Figure B-1 Labels on the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack........................................................................................B-4
Figure B-2 Labels on the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack........................................................................................B-4
Figure B-3 Labels on a board..............................................................................................................................B-5
Figure B-4 Optical module labels........................................................................................................................B-5

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxv


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 Indicators on the ETSI cabinet.............................................................................................................2-3


Table 2-2 Connection of power terminals at side A and side B...........................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.......................................................................................2-5
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards of the OptiX OSN
1500A....................................................................................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards of the OptiX OSN
1500B....................................................................................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A.......................................................................3-8
Table 3-4 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.....................................................................3-12
Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack..............................................................3-17
Table 3-6 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack...................................................3-17
Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack..............................................................3-18
Table 3-8 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...................................................3-18
Table 4-1 Appearance and dimensions of boards for the OptiX OSN 1500........................................................4-2
Table 4-2 SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A.............................................................................4-4
Table 4-3 SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B.............................................................................4-5
Table 4-4 PDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A.............................................................................4-7
Table 4-5 PDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B.............................................................................4-7
Table 4-6 Data processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A.............................................................................4-8
Table 4-7 Data processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B.............................................................................4-8
Table 4-8 Interface boards and switching boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A.....................................4-9
Table 4-9 Interface boards and switching boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B......................................4-9
Table 4-10 Cross-connect boards and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-11 Auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B......................4-10
Table 4-12 Optical add/drop multiplexing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A..................................4-11
Table 4-13 Optical add/drop multiplexing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B..................................4-11
Table 4-14 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A/B
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-12
Table 5-1 Version Description of the SL1............................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Functions and features of the SL1........................................................................................................5-4
Table 5-3 Optical interfaces of the SL1................................................................................................................5-8
Table 5-4 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..............................................5-9
Table 5-5 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL1.............................................................................5-10

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxvii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Tables Hardware Description

Table 5-6 Version Description of the SLQ1.......................................................................................................5-12


Table 5-7 Functions and features of the SLQ1...................................................................................................5-12
Table 5-8 Optical interfaces of the SLQ1...........................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-9 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type............................................5-17
Table 5-10 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1........................................................................5-18
Table 5-11 Functions and features of the SLO1 board.......................................................................................5-20
Table 5-12 Optical interfaces of the SLO1.........................................................................................................5-23
Table 5-13 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................5-24
Table 5-14 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLO1........................................................................5-25
Table 5-15 Functions and features of the SLT1.................................................................................................5-26
Table 5-16 Optical interfaces of the SLT1.........................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-17 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLT1........................................................................5-31
Table 5-18 Functions and features of the SEP1.................................................................................................5-33
Table 5-19 Access capabilities for the SEP1......................................................................................................5-34
Table 5-20 Electrical interfaces of the SEP1......................................................................................................5-39
Table 5-21 Slots for the SEP1, EU08 and TSB8................................................................................................5-40
Table 5-22 Technical specifications of the SEP1 board.....................................................................................5-41
Table 5-23 Version Description of the SL4........................................................................................................5-42
Table 5-24 Functions and features of the SL4....................................................................................................5-42
Table 5-25 Optical interfaces of the SL4............................................................................................................5-47
Table 5-26 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the SL4........................5-47
Table 5-27 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL4...........................................................................5-48
Table 5-28 Version Description of the SLD4.....................................................................................................5-50
Table 5-29 Functions and features of the SLD4.................................................................................................5-50
Table 5-30 Optical interfaces of the SLD4.........................................................................................................5-55
Table 5-31 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the SLD4.....................5-56
Table 5-32 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLD4........................................................................5-56
Table 5-33 Version Description of the SLQ4.....................................................................................................5-58
Table 5-34 Functions and features of the SLQ4.................................................................................................5-59
Table 5-35 Optical interfaces of the SLQ4.........................................................................................................5-62
Table 5-36 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the SLQ4.....................5-63
Table 5-37 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLQ4........................................................................5-64
Table 5-38 Version Description of the SL16......................................................................................................5-65
Table 5-39 Functions and features of the SL16..................................................................................................5-66
Table 5-40 Optical interfaces of the SL16..........................................................................................................5-70
Table 5-41 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type for the SL16.....................5-70
Table 5-42 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL16.........................................................................5-71
Table 5-43 Specifications of the ITU-T G.692-compliant optical interfaces that output standard wavelengths
.............................................................................................................................................................................5-72
Table 5-44 Version Description of the SL16A...................................................................................................5-73
Table 5-45 Functions and features of the SL16A...............................................................................................5-74
Table 5-46 Optical interfaces of the SL16A.......................................................................................................5-78
Table 5-47 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................5-79

xxviii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Tables

Table 5-48 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL16A......................................................................5-79


Table 5-49 Functions and features of the SF16..................................................................................................5-81
Table 5-50 Optical interfaces of the SF16..........................................................................................................5-86
Table 5-51 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SF16.........................................................................5-87
Table 5-52 Specifications of the ITU-T G.692-compliant optical interfaces that output standard wavelengths
.............................................................................................................................................................................5-87
Table 6-1 Functions and features of the PL1........................................................................................................6-3
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the front panel of the PL1...............................................................................................6-7
Table 6-3 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the PL1............................6-7
Table 6-4 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the PL1...........................................................................6-8
Table 6-5 Version Description of the PD1...........................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-6 Functions and features of the PD1.......................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-7 Valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the L75S and L12S in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-14
Table 6-8 Valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the D75S and D12S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-14
Table 6-9 Relation between the board feature code and the interface impedance type.....................................6-15
Table 6-10 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.......6-17
Table 6-11 Version Description of the PQ1.......................................................................................................6-18
Table 6-12 Functions and features of the PQ1...................................................................................................6-19
Table 6-13 Valid slots for the PQ1 and corresponding slots for the D75S, D12S or D12B in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack................................................................................................................................................................6-24
Table 6-14 Relation between the board feature code and the interface impedance type...................................6-24
Table 6-15 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.......6-25
Table 6-16 Functions and features of the PQM..................................................................................................6-27
Table 6-17 Valid slots for the PQM and corresponding slots for the D12S and D12B in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack................................................................................................................................................................6-32
Table 6-18 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-19 Version description of the PL3........................................................................................................6-35
Table 6-20 Functions and features of the PL3....................................................................................................6-36
Table 6-21 Valid slots for the PL3 and corresponding slots for the C34S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-40
Table 6-22 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack........6-41
Table 6-23 Slots for the PL3, C34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...........................................6-42
Table 6-24 Version description of the PL3A......................................................................................................6-44
Table 6-25 Functions and features of the PL3A.................................................................................................6-44
Table 6-26 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the PL3A....................................................................6-48
Table 6-27 Version Description of the PD3.......................................................................................................6-50
Table 6-28 Functions and features of the PD3...................................................................................................6-50
Table 6-29 Valid slots for the PD3 and corresponding slots for the D34S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-55
Table 6-30 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.......6-56
Table 6-31 Slots for the PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...........................................6-56

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxix


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Tables Hardware Description

Table 6-32 Functions and features of the PQ3...................................................................................................6-58


Table 6-33 Valid slots for the PQ3 and corresponding slots for the D34S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-62
Table 6-34 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.......6-63
Table 6-35 Slots for the PQ3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...........................................6-63
Table 6-36 Functions and features of the DX1...................................................................................................6-65
Table 6-37 Valid slots for the DX1 and corresponding slots for the DM12 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-68
Table 6-38 Relation between the board feature code and the interface impedance type...................................6-69
Table 6-39 Slots for the DX1 and DM12 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack....................................................6-70
Table 6-40 Functions and features of the DXA..................................................................................................6-72
Table 6-41 Version Description of the SPQ4.....................................................................................................6-76
Table 6-42 Functions and features of the SPQ4.................................................................................................6-76
Table 6-43 Valid slots for the SPQ4 and corresponding slots for the MU04 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................6-82
Table 6-44 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.......................................6-83
Table 7-1 Functions and features of the EFT4.....................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-2 Optical interfaces of the EFT4.............................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-3 Pins of the RJ-45 of the EFT4..............................................................................................................7-8
Table 7-4 Functions and features of the EFT8.....................................................................................................7-9
Table 7-5 Optical interfaces of the EFT8...........................................................................................................7-14
Table 7-6 Pins of the RJ-45 of the EFT8............................................................................................................7-14
Table 7-7 Valid slots for the EFT8 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
.............................................................................................................................................................................7-15
Table 7-8 Valid slots for the EFT8 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
.............................................................................................................................................................................7-15
Table 7-9 Functions and features of the EFT8A................................................................................................7-16
Table 7-10 Optical interfaces of the EFT8A......................................................................................................7-21
Table 7-11 Pins of the RJ-45 of the EFT8A.......................................................................................................7-21
Table 7-12 Functions and features of the EGT2.................................................................................................7-23
Table 7-13 Optical interfaces of the EGT2.........................................................................................................7-27
Table 7-14 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................7-27
Table 7-15 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the EGT2........................................................................7-28
Table 7-16 Version Description of the EFS0.....................................................................................................7-30
Table 7-17 Functions and features of the EFS0.................................................................................................7-30
Table 7-18 Valid slots for the EFS0 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack................................................................................................................................................................7-36
Table 7-19 Version Description of the EFS4.....................................................................................................7-38
Table 7-20 Functions and features of the EFS4.................................................................................................7-39
Table 7-21 Optical interfaces of the EFS4.........................................................................................................7-44
Table 7-22 Pins of the RJ-45 of the EFS4..........................................................................................................7-44
Table 7-23 Version Description of the EGS2.....................................................................................................7-46
Table 7-24 Functions and features of the EGS2.................................................................................................7-47
Table 7-25 Optical interfaces of the EGS2.........................................................................................................7-53

xxx Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Tables

Table 7-26 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................7-53
Table 7-27 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the EGS2........................................................................7-54
Table 7-28 Functions and features of the EMS4................................................................................................7-55
Table 7-29 Optical interfaces of the EMS4........................................................................................................7-62
Table 7-30 Valid slots for the EMS4 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack................................................................................................................................................................7-62
Table 7-31 Valid slots for the EMS4 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack................................................................................................................................................................7-62
Table 7-32 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................7-63
Table 7-33 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the EMS4.......................................................................7-66
Table 7-34 Functions and features of the EGS4.................................................................................................7-68
Table 7-35 Optical interfaces of the EGS4.........................................................................................................7-74
Table 7-36 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................7-74
Table 7-37 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the EGS4........................................................................7-78
Table 7-38 Functions and features of the EGR2................................................................................................7-79
Table 7-39 Optical interfaces of the EGR2 .......................................................................................................7-86
Table 7-40 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................7-86
Table 7-41 Specifications of the interfaces of the EGR2...................................................................................7-87
Table 7-42 Version description of the EMR0....................................................................................................7-88
Table 7-43 Comparison of features of the N1EMR0 and N2EMR0..................................................................7-88
Table 7-44 Functions and features of the EMR0................................................................................................7-89
Table 7-45 Optical interfaces of the EMR0 .......................................................................................................7-97
Table 7-46 Valid slots for the EMR0 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack................................................................................................................................................................7-97
Table 7-47 Valid slots for the EMR0 and corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack................................................................................................................................................................7-97
Table 7-48 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................7-98
Table 7-49 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the EMR0.......................................................................7-98
Table 7-50 Functions and features of the ADL4..............................................................................................7-100
Table 7-51 Optical interface of the ADL4 .......................................................................................................7-104
Table 7-52 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type........................................7-104
Table 7-53 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the ADL4.....................................................................7-105
Table 7-54 Functions and features of the ADQ1..............................................................................................7-107
Table 7-55 Optical interfaces of the ADQ1 .....................................................................................................7-111
Table 7-56 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type........................................7-111
Table 7-57 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the ADQ1.....................................................................7-112
Table 7-58 Functions and features of the IDL4................................................................................................7-114
Table 7-59 Optical interface of the IDL4 ........................................................................................................7-118
Table 7-60 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type........................................7-118
Table 7-61 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the IDL4.......................................................................7-119
Table 7-62 Functions and features of the IDQ1...............................................................................................7-121
Table 7-63 Optical interfaces of the IDQ1 ......................................................................................................7-126
Table 7-64 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type........................................7-126

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxxi


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Tables Hardware Description

Table 7-65 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the IDQ1......................................................................7-127


Table 7-66 Functions and features of the MST4..............................................................................................7-129
Table 7-67 Services and service rates provided by the MST4.........................................................................7-129
Table 7-68 Optical interfaces of the MST4......................................................................................................7-133
Table 7-69 Relation between the board feature code and service type............................................................7-133
Table 7-70 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the MST4.....................................................................7-134
Table 8-1 Valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the L12S in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
...............................................................................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-2 Interfaces on the front panel of the D12B............................................................................................8-7
Table 8-3 Pins of the DB44 interfaces of the D12B.............................................................................................8-8
Table 8-4 Valid slots for the PQ1/PQM and corresponding slots for the D12B in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
...............................................................................................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-5 Interfaces on the front panel of the D12S..........................................................................................8-11
Table 8-6 Pins of the DB44 interfaces of the D12S...........................................................................................8-12
Table 8-7 Valid slots for the PQ1/PQM and corresponding slots for the D12S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-12
Table 8-8 Valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the L75S...........................................................8-15
Table 8-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the D75S..........................................................................................8-18
Table 8-10 Pins of the DB44 interfaces of the D75S.........................................................................................8-19
Table 8-11 Valid slots for the PQ1/PQM and corresponding slots for the D75S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-19
Table 8-12 Interfaces of the D34S......................................................................................................................8-22
Table 8-13 Valid slots for the PD3 and corresponding slots for the D34S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-23
Table 8-14 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the D34S....................................................................8-23
Table 8-15 Interfaces of the C34S......................................................................................................................8-26
Table 8-16 Valid slots for the PL3 and corresponding slots for the C34S in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-26
Table 8-17 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the C34S.....................................................................8-26
Table 8-18 Interfaces of the EU04.....................................................................................................................8-29
Table 8-19 Valid slots for the SEP and corresponding slots for the EU04........................................................8-30
Table 8-20 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EU04....................................................................8-30
Table 8-21 Interfaces of the EU08.....................................................................................................................8-33
Table 8-22 Valid slots for the SEP and corresponding slots for the EU08........................................................8-33
Table 8-23 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EU08....................................................................8-33
Table 8-24 Version description of the OU08.....................................................................................................8-34
Table 8-25 Interfaces of the N1OU08................................................................................................................8-37
Table 8-26 Interfaces of the N2OU08................................................................................................................8-38
Table 8-27 Valid slots for the SEP and corresponding slots for the OU08........................................................8-38
Table 8-28 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the OU08........................................................................8-38
Table 8-29 Interfaces of the MU04....................................................................................................................8-41
Table 8-30 Valid slots for the SPQ4 and corresponding slots for the MU04.....................................................8-42
Table 8-31 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the MU04...................................................................8-42
Table 8-32 Valid slots for the TSB8 and corresponding slots for the SPQ4 and MU04....................................8-45

xxxii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Tables

Table 8-33 Valid slots for the TSB8 and corresponding slots for the PD3 and D34S.......................................8-45
Table 8-34 Valid slots for the TSB8 and corresponding slots for the SEP and EU04.......................................8-45
Table 8-35 Valid slots for the TSB8 and corresponding slots for the SEP and EU08.......................................8-45
Table 8-36 Valid slots for the TSB8 and corresponding slots for the EFS0 and ETS8.....................................8-46
Table 8-37 Valid slots for the TSB8 and corresponding slots for the PL3 and C34S........................................8-46
Table 8-38 Interfaces of the EFF8......................................................................................................................8-49
Table 8-39 Valid slots for the EFT8 and corresponding slots for the EFF8......................................................8-49
Table 8-40 Valid slots for the EFS0 and corresponding slots for the EFF8.......................................................8-49
Table 8-41 Valid slots for the EMS4 and corresponding slots for the EFF8.....................................................8-49
Table 8-42 Valid slots for the EMR0 and corresponding slots for the EFF8.....................................................8-50
Table 8-43 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the EFF8........................................................................8-50
Table 8-44 Interfaces of the ETF8......................................................................................................................8-53
Table 8-45 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the ETF8.........................................................................................8-54
Table 8-46 Valid slots for the EFT8 and corresponding slots for the ETF8......................................................8-54
Table 8-47 Valid slots for the EFS0 and corresponding slots for the ETF8......................................................8-55
Table 8-48 Valid slots for the EMS4 and corresponding slots for the ETF8.....................................................8-55
Table 8-49 Valid slots for the EMR0 and corresponding slots for the ETF8.....................................................8-55
Table 8-50 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the ETF8....................................................................8-55
Table 8-51 Interfaces of the ETS8......................................................................................................................8-58
Table 8-52 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the ETS8.........................................................................................8-59
Table 8-53 Valid slots for the EFS0 and corresponding slots for the ETS8......................................................8-59
Table 8-54 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the ETS8....................................................................8-59
Table 8-55 Interfaces on the front panel of the DM12.......................................................................................8-62
Table 8-56 Pins of the DB44 interfaces of the DM12........................................................................................8-63
Table 8-57 Pins of the DB28 interfaces of the DM12........................................................................................8-64
Table 8-58 Valid slots for the DX1 and corresponding slots for the DM12......................................................8-64
Table 9-1 Function and feature of the SDH processing unit of the CXL1...........................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Function and feature of the SCC unit of the CXL1.............................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Function and feature of the cross-connect unit of the CXL1...............................................................9-4
Table 9-4 Function and feature of the clock unit of the CXL1............................................................................9-5
Table 9-5 Optical interface and switches on the CXL1......................................................................................9-11
Table 9-6 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type............................................9-11
Table 9-7 Logical slots displayed on the T2000 for the CXL1..........................................................................9-12
Table 9-8 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the CXL1.........................................................................9-12
Table 9-9 Function and feature of the SDH processing unit of the CXL4.........................................................9-14
Table 9-10 Function and feature of the SCC unit of the CXL4.........................................................................9-15
Table 9-11 Function and feature of the cross-connect unit of the CXL4...........................................................9-16
Table 9-12 Function and feature of the clock unit of the CXL4........................................................................9-16
Table 9-13 Optical interface and switches on the CXL4....................................................................................9-22
Table 9-14 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................9-22
Table 9-15 Logical slots displayed on the T2000 for the CXL4........................................................................9-23
Table 9-16 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the CXL4.......................................................................9-23

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxxiii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Tables Hardware Description

Table 9-17 Function and feature of the SDH processing unit of the CXL16.....................................................9-25
Table 9-18 Function and feature of the SCC unit of the CXL16.......................................................................9-26
Table 9-19 Function and feature of the cross-connect unit of the CXL16.........................................................9-27
Table 9-20 Function and feature of the clock unit of the CXL16......................................................................9-27
Table 9-21 Optical interface and switches on the CXL16..................................................................................9-33
Table 9-22 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type..........................................9-33
Table 9-23 Logical slots displayed on the T2000 for the CXL16......................................................................9-34
Table 9-24 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the CXL16.....................................................................9-34
Table 10-1 Functions and features of the EOW.................................................................................................10-2
Table 10-2 Interfaces on the front panel of the EOW........................................................................................10-4
Table 10-3 Pins of the PHONE interface of the EOW.......................................................................................10-5
Table 10-4 Pins of the S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces of the EOW......................................................................10-5
Table 10-5 Functions and features of the AUX..................................................................................................10-7
Table 10-6 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX.......................................................................................10-12
Table 10-7 Pins of the CLK interface of the AUX...........................................................................................10-13
Table 10-8 Pins of the ETH and COM interfaces of the AUX.........................................................................10-13
Table 10-9 Pins of the ALM interface of the AUX..........................................................................................10-13
Table 10-10 Pins of the OAM interface of the AUX.......................................................................................10-14
Table 10-11 Pins of the F&f interface of the AUX..........................................................................................10-14
Table 10-12 Functions and features of the AMU.............................................................................................10-16
Table 10-13 Interfaces on the front panel of the AMU....................................................................................10-18
Table 10-14 Pins of the PHONE interface of the AMU...................................................................................10-19
Table 10-15 Pins of the S1 and S2 interfaces of the AMU..............................................................................10-19
Table 10-16 Pins of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces of the AMU.............................................................10-19
Table 10-17 Functions and features of the FAN..............................................................................................10-21
Table 11-1 Functions and features of the CMR2...............................................................................................11-3
Table 11-2 Optical interfaces of the CMR2.......................................................................................................11-7
Table 11-3 Feature code of the CMR2...............................................................................................................11-7
Table 11-4 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the CMR2......................................................................11-8
Table 11-5 Functions and features of the CMR4.............................................................................................11-10
Table 11-6 Optical interfaces of the CMR4.....................................................................................................11-13
Table 11-7 Feature code of the CMR4.............................................................................................................11-13
Table 11-8 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the CMR4....................................................................11-14
Table 11-9 Functions and features of the MR2................................................................................................11-16
Table 11-10 Optical interfaces of the MR2......................................................................................................11-19
Table 11-11 Feature code of the MR2..............................................................................................................11-19
Table 11-12 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the MR2.....................................................................11-20
Table 11-13 Functions and features of the MR2A...........................................................................................11-22
Table 11-14 Optical interfaces of the MR2A...................................................................................................11-25
Table 11-15 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the MR2A..................................................................11-25
Table 11-16 Functions and features of the MR2B...........................................................................................11-27
Table 11-17 Optical interfaces of the MR2B...................................................................................................11-30

xxxiv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Tables

Table 11-18 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the MR2B..................................................................11-30


Table 11-19 Functions and features of the MR2C...........................................................................................11-32
Table 11-20 Optical interfaces of the MR2C...................................................................................................11-35
Table 11-21 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the MR2C..................................................................11-36
Table 11-22 Functions and features of the MR4..............................................................................................11-37
Table 11-23 Optical interfaces of the MR4......................................................................................................11-41
Table 11-24 Board feature code.......................................................................................................................11-41
Table 11-25 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the MR4.....................................................................11-42
Table 11-26 Functions and features of the LWX.............................................................................................11-44
Table 11-27 Optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX........................................................................11-48
Table 11-28 Relation between the board feature code and the receive/transmit scheme.................................11-48
Table 11-29 Specifications of the client-side optical interfaces of the LWX...................................................11-48
Table 11-30 Specifications of the WDM-side optical interfaces of the LWX.................................................11-49
Table 11-31 Functions and features of the OBU1............................................................................................11-52
Table 11-32 Optical interfaces of the OBU1....................................................................................................11-55
Table 11-33 Feature code of the OBU1............................................................................................................11-55
Table 11-34 Specifications of optical interfaces of the OBU1.........................................................................11-56
Table 11-35 Functions and features of the FIB................................................................................................11-58
Table 11-36 Optical interfaces of the FIB .......................................................................................................11-59
Table 11-37 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the FIB.......................................................................11-60
Table 12-1 Functions and features of the BA2...................................................................................................12-3
Table 12-2 Optical interfaces of the BA2 ..........................................................................................................12-7
Table 12-3 Relation between the board feature code and output optical power for the BA2............................12-7
Table 12-4 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the BA2..........................................................................12-8
Table 12-5 Functions and features of the BPA...................................................................................................12-9
Table 12-6 Optical interfaces of the BPA .......................................................................................................12-13
Table 12-7 Relation between the board feature code and output optical power for the BPA..........................12-13
Table 12-8 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the BPA........................................................................12-14
Table 12-9 Version Description of the COA....................................................................................................12-15
Table 12-10 Functions and features of the 61COA and N1COA.....................................................................12-16
Table 12-11 Functions and features of the 62COA..........................................................................................12-18
Table 12-12 Pins of the RS232 interface..........................................................................................................12-22
Table 12-13 Pins of the MONITOR-1 and MONITOR-2 interfaces...............................................................12-22
Table 12-14 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the 62COA..................................................................................12-23
Table 12-15 Relation between the board feature code and output optical power for the 61COA...................12-24
Table 12-16 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the COA.....................................................................12-24
Table 13-1 Functions and features of the UPM..................................................................................................13-3
Table 13-2 Interfaces on the rear panel of the UPM..........................................................................................13-5
Table 13-3 Pins of the RS232 interface of the UPM..........................................................................................13-5
Table 13-4 Specifications of the power supply of the UPM..............................................................................13-6
Table 13-5 Functions and features of the PIU....................................................................................................13-8
Table 13-6 Interfaces on the front panel of the PIU.........................................................................................13-10

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxxv


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Tables Hardware Description

Table 13-7 Functions and features of the PIUA...............................................................................................13-12


Table 13-8 Interfaces and switch on the front panel of the PIUA....................................................................13-14
Table 14-1 Types of fiber jumpers.....................................................................................................................14-2
Table 14-2 Types of connectors.........................................................................................................................14-3
Table 14-3 Equipment –48 V/–60 V power cable..............................................................................................14-8
Table 14-4 Connection of the UPM power cable...............................................................................................14-9
Table 14-5 Specifications of the UPM power cable.........................................................................................14-10
Table 14-6 Pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable.............................................................................14-11
Table 14-7 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable................................................................................14-13
Table 14-8 Pin assignment of the Serial 1–4/F1/F&f serial port cable............................................................14-15
Table 14-9 Pin assignment of the RS232/RS-422 serial port cable.................................................................14-16
Table 14-10 Pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire............................................................................14-17
Table 14-11 Pin assignment of the COA concatenating cable.........................................................................14-18
Table 14-12 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...............................................................................14-19
Table 14-13 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.........................................................................................14-20
Table 14-14 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable.................................................................................14-22
Table 14-15 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable...............................................................................14-24
Table 14-16 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable.....................................................................................14-27
Table 14-17 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable.............................................................................14-28
Table 14-18 Pin assignment of the DB28 connector of the DM12..................................................................14-31
Table 14-19 Pin assignment of the V.35 DCE cable........................................................................................14-33
Table 14-20 Pin assignment of the V.35 DTE cable........................................................................................14-35
Table 14-21 Pin assignment of the V.24 DCE cable........................................................................................14-36
Table 14-22 Technical specifications of the V.24 DCE cable..........................................................................14-37
Table 14-23 Pin assignment of the V.24 DTE cable........................................................................................14-38
Table 14-24 Technical specifications of the V.24 DTE cable..........................................................................14-38
Table 14-25 Pin assignment of the X.21 DCE cable........................................................................................14-39
Table 14-26 Technical specifications of the X.21 DCE cable..........................................................................14-40
Table 14-27 Pin assignment of the X.21 DTE cable........................................................................................14-41
Table 14-28 Technical specifications of the X.12 DTE cable..........................................................................14-41
Table 14-29 Pin assignment of the RS449 DCE cable.....................................................................................14-42
Table 14-30 Specifications of the RS449 DCE cable.......................................................................................14-43
Table 14-31 Pin assignment of the RS449 DTE cable.....................................................................................14-43
Table 14-32 Specifications of the RS449 DTE cable.......................................................................................14-44
Table 14-33 Pin assignment of the RS530 DCE cable.....................................................................................14-45
Table 14-34 Specifications of the RS530 DCE cable.......................................................................................14-46
Table 14-35 Pin assignment of the RS530 DTE cable.....................................................................................14-47
Table 14-36 Specifications of the RS530 DTE cable.......................................................................................14-48
Table 14-37 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm clock cable.................................................................................14-49
Table 14-38 Pin assignment of the two-channel clock transfer cable (75 ohms to 120 ohms)........................14-51
Table B-1 Labels on the equipment.....................................................................................................................B-2
Table B-2 Optical module code and type mapping table.....................................................................................B-5

xxxvi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Tables

Table B-3 Huawei specifications for engineering labels.....................................................................................B-7


Table C-1 Power consumption and weight of each board for the OptiX OSN 1500..........................................C-1
Table D-1 Board versions that are compatible with the OptiX OSN products....................................................D-1
Table E-1 Loopbacks of the SDH boards for the OptiX OSN equipment...........................................................E-1
Table E-2 Loopbacks of the PDH boards for the OptiX OSN equipment...........................................................E-2
Table E-3 Loopbacks of the Ethernet boards for the OptiX OSN equipment.....................................................E-3
Table E-4 Loopbacks of the Ethernet boards for the OptiX OSN equipment.....................................................E-4
Table F-1 Mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2.......................................................F-2
Table F-2 Mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2.......................................................F-3
Table F-3 Mapping relation between the service type and setting of the V5.......................................................F-3
Table F-4 Mapping relation between the service type and setting of the V5.......................................................F-6

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxxvii


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the equipment structure, subrack structure and board classification.
This document also describes each board of different classes in details.

This document helps you get the detailed information on the equipment hardware.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 1500 V100R007

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R005C01

Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document are:

l Network planners and designers


l Installation personnel
l Commissioning engineers
l Network monitors
l Data configuration engineers
l Maintenance engineers
l On-site maintenance engineers

Organization
This document describes the cabinet, subrack, boards and each unit of the boards in terms of the
function and working principle.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
About This Document Hardware Description

Chapter Description

1 Equipment Structure This chapter describes the structure of the equipment.

2 Cabinet This chapter describes the dimensions, appearance and


technical specifications of the cabinet. This chapter also
describes the configuration of the equipment in each
cabinet.

3 Subrack This chapter describes the structure of the subrack.

4 Board List and This chapter describes the classification of boards and
Classification appearance of the boards.

5 SDH Processing Boards This chapter describes the SDH processing boards in terms
of the function, principle, front panel, interface and
technical specifications.

6 PDH Processing Boards This chapter describes the PDH processing boards in terms
of the function, principle, front panel, interface and
technical specifications.

7 Data Processing Boards This chapter describes the data processing boards in terms
of the function, principle, front panel, interface and
technical specifications.

8 Interface Boards and This chapter describes the interface boards and switching
Switching Boards boards in terms of the function, principle, front panel,
interface and technical specifications.

9 Cross-Connect and System This chapter describes the cross-connect and system control
Control Boards boards in terms of the function, principle, front panel,
interface and technical specifications.

10 Auxiliary Boards This chapter describes the auxiliary boards in terms of the
function, principle, front panel, interface and technical
specifications.

11 WDM Processing Boards This chapter describes the WDM processing boards in
terms of the function, principle, front panel, interface and
technical specifications.

12 Optical Amplifier Boards This chapter describes the optical amplifier boards and
and Dispersion dispersion compensation boards in terms of the function,
Compensation Boards principle, front panel, interface and technical
specifications.

13 Power Interface Boards This chapter describes the power interface boards in terms
of the function, principle, front panel, interface and
technical specifications.

14 Cables This chapter describes the external cables and internal


cables in terms of the structure, appearance, pin assignment
and technical specifications.

A Equipment and Board This appendix describes the indication of the equipment and
Alarm Indicators board alarm indicators.

2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description About This Document

Chapter Description

B Labels This appendix describes the safety labels, optical module


labels and engineering labels.

C Power Consumption and This appendix describes the power consumption and weight
Weight of each board.

D Board Version This appendix describes the compatibility among the


Configuration product versions.

E Board Loopbacks This appendix describes the loopback capabilities of the


boards.

F Board Configuration This appendix describes the parameters that can be


Reference configured by using the T2000.

G Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.

H Acronyms and This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in
Abbreviations this document.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not


avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
you time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
About This Document Hardware Description

Convention Description

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.
One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and


separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.
A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.

GUI Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the “>” signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operation
Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means
the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys
should be pressed in turn.

4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description About This Document

Mouse Operation
Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain
position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Based on Product Version V100R007


The updated contents are as follows.

This release of the document fixes several bugs, adds product labels, and checks the parameters
of the dimensions and weight. It also details function block diagram and relative description for
each board.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Based on Product Version V100R007


This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006,
this version has the following new or optimized content:
l The N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2,
TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4 are added.
l Appendix E "Board Loopbacks" and Appendix F "Board Configuration Reference" are
added.
l The structure of the board description is adjusted and optimized. First the board version is
described, and then the board function and feature, working principle and signal flow, front
panel, valid slots, board feature code, board configuration reference, technical
specifications and so on are described.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R006


The updated contents are as follows.

This release of the document fixes several bugs, adds product labels. It also checks the parameters
of the slots and optical interfaces. In addition, it adds the description on the N1SL64 board.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-01-10) Based on Product Version V100R006


The updated contents are as follows.

This release of the document fixes several bugs in the document of previous version. The T2000
is upgraded from V200R003C02 to V200R004C01.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
About This Document Hardware Description

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-09-20) Based on Product Version V100R006


This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release.

Updates in Issue 03 (2006-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005


The updated contents are as follows.
With updated naming of versions, this release of the document fixes several bugs in the manual
of the previous version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2006-06-20) Based on Product Version V100R005


The former manual version is T2-042521-20060620-C-1.51.
The updated contents are as follows.
This release of the document fixes several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-03-20) Based on Product Version V100R005


The former manual version is T2-042521-20060320-C-1.50.
This document of the V100R005 version is of the first release.

6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 1 Equipment Structure

1 Equipment Structure

The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B are both case-shaped equipment. The OptiX
OSN 1500A/B subrack can be installed in a 300-mm or 600-mm ETSI cabinet, or a 19-inch
cabinet. The OptiX OSN 1500A/B can also be installed against the wall. The OptiX OSN 1500A
can be installed on the desk.

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 2 Cabinet

2 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN subracks are installed in the cabinets.

2.1 Cabinet Type


The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack can be installed in a 300-mm or 600-mm ETSI cabinet, 19-inch
cabinet or the cabinet used for the access network equipment. The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack
can be installed against the wall.
2.2 Cabinet Configuration
On the top of the ETSI cabinet, there are cabinet indicators and a DC power distribution unit
(PDU).
2.3 Technical Specifications
The specifications of the cabinet cover the dimensions, weight and number of allowed subracks.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
2 Cabinet Hardware Description

2.1 Cabinet Type


The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack can be installed in a 300-mm or 600-mm ETSI cabinet, 19-inch
cabinet or the cabinet used for the access network equipment. The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack
can be installed against the wall.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in the following cabinets:
l 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet
l 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet
l 19-inch cabinet
l Cabinet used for the access network equipment

2.2 Cabinet Configuration


On the top of the ETSI cabinet, there are cabinet indicators and a DC power distribution unit
(PDU).
Figure 2-1 shows where the cabinet indicators and the DC PDU are on the cabinet.

Figure 2-1 ETSI cabinet


1

PowerCritical MajorMinor

Power distribution unit

W D

1. Cabinet indicator 2. DC PDU

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicator


The indicators on the ETSI cabinet are power supply indicators and alarm severity indicators.
2.2.2 DC PDU
The DC PDU is on the top of the cabinet and used to supply power for the equipment.
2.2.3 Other Configuration

2-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 2 Cabinet

The external case-shaped devices can be installed in the cabinet as required.

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicator


The indicators on the ETSI cabinet are power supply indicators and alarm severity indicators.

Table 2-1 lists the information about the indicators on the ETSI cabinet.

Table 2-1 Indicators on the ETSI cabinet

Indicator State Indication

Normal power supply indicator: Power Lit The power is supplied


(green) to the equipment.

Unlit No power is supplied to


the equipment.

Critical alarm indicator: Critical (red) Lit Critical alarms are


generated in the
equipment.

Unlit No critical alarms are


generated in the
equipment.

Major alarm indicator: Major (orange) Lit Major alarms are


generated in the
equipment.

Unlit No major alarms are


generated in the
equipment.

Minor alarm indicator: Minor (yellow) Lit Minor alarms are


generated in the
equipment.

Unlit No minor alarms are


generated in the
equipment.

CAUTION
The cabinet indicators are driven by the subrack. The cabinet indicators can be lit only after the
cables are correctly connected and the subrack is powered on.

2.2.2 DC PDU
The DC PDU is on the top of the cabinet and used to supply power for the equipment.

Figure 2-2 shows the appearance of the DC PDU.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
2 Cabinet Hardware Description

Figure 2-2 Appearance of the DC PDU


1 7 2 3 4 5 8 6

1 2 3
OUTPUT
4
A B 1 2 3
OUTPUT
4

ON ON

RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

OFF OFF
INPUT
32A 32A 20A 20A 32A 32A 20A 20A

1. Power terminal (A) 2. Power cable RTN1 (+)


3. Power cable RTN2 (+) 4. Power cable NEG1 (–)
5. Power cable NEG2 (–) 6. Power terminal (B)
7. PGND 8. Power switch

For the OptiX OSN 1500A, the power terminals at side A and side B supply power to the PIU
boards at side A and side B of the subrack respectively. Table 2-2 shows the connections of the
power terminals at side A and side B.

For the OptiX OSN 1500B, the power terminals at sides A and B supply power to the PIU boards
at the upper and lower subrack respectively.

Table 2-2 Connection of power terminals at side A and side B

Power Corresponding Subrack Power Corresponding Subrack


Terminal at and PIU Board Terminal and PIU Board
Side A at Side B

1 The PIU board at side A of 1 The PIU board at side B of


the first subrack the first subrack

2 The PIU board at side A of 2 The PIU board at side B of


the second subrack the second subrack

3 The PIU board at side A of 3 The PIU board at side B of


the third subrack the third subrack

4 The PIU board at side A of 4 The PIU board at side B of


the fourth subrack the fourth subrack

2.2.3 Other Configuration


The external case-shaped devices can be installed in the cabinet as required.
l UPM

The UPM numbered GIE4805S can directly supply power to the OptiX OSN 1500. The UPM
directly converts the 220 V mains supply to the –48 V DC power supply required by the

2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 2 Cabinet

communication equipment. If operators cannot provide the –48 V DC power supply for the
equipment or require that the battery be used, the UPM can be applied.
l COA
l Fiber management spool, which is used to spool the redundant fibers inside the cabinet.

2.3 Technical Specifications


The specifications of the cabinet cover the dimensions, weight and number of allowed subracks.
Table 2-3 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.

Table 2-3 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of Allowed OptiX
OSN 1500A/1500B Subracks

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55 The number of allowed OptiX
OSN 1500A/1500B subracks
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79 varies with the cabinet capacity
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60 and the number of the power
supplies.
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

3 Subrack

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the cabinet in terms of the structure, capacity, slot allocation and technical
specifications.

3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area
for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area. The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area
for interface boards, slot area for the auxiliary interface board, power supply area and fan area.
3.2 Capacity
Both the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have slots that can be divided into half-
width slots. These slots have different service access capacities before and after the slot division.
3.3 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one tier, where 12 slots are present before the division
of slots. The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two tiers. The upper tier of the subrack, where four
slots are present, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower tier of the subrack, where ten
slots are present before the division of slots (including slots 4 and 5), is the slot area for processing
boards.
3.4 Technical Specifications
The specifications of the subrack cover dimensions, weight and maximum power consumption.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area
for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area. The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area
for interface boards, slot area for the auxiliary interface board, power supply area and fan area.
Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack

2
3 H
4 W
D
6

1. Fan area 2. Slot area for boards 3. Power supply area


4. Slot area for interface boards 5. Fiber routing area 6. Mounting ear

The functions of these areas are as follows:


l Slot area for boards: This area is used to house the boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A.
l Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates heat generated by
the equipment.
l Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to supply
power for the equipment.
l Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.

Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

2
3

4
4
H

W
5 D
7

1. Slot area for interface boards 2. Power supply area 3. Fan area
4. Slot area for processing boards 5. Slot area for the auxiliary interface board 6. Fiber routing area
7. Mounting ear

The functions of these areas are as follows:

l Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the tributary interface boards and
Ethernet interface boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
l Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the line, tributary and Ethernet
processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
l Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates heat generated by
the equipment.
l Slot area for the auxiliary interface board: This area is used to house the auxiliary interface
board, which provides alarm interfaces, orderwire phone interface, management and
maintenance interface, and clock interface.
l Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to supply
power for the equipment.
l Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.

3.2 Capacity
Both the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have slots that can be divided into half-
width slots. These slots have different service access capacities before and after the slot division.

In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, slots 12 and 13 can be divided into half-width slots. In the
OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, slots 11–13 can be divided into half-width slots. Figure 3-3 shows

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A. Figure 3-4 shows the slot access capacity of
the OptiX OSN 1500B.

In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, slots 12 and 13 can be divided into half-width slots.

l When slot 12 is divided, the two half-width slots are numbered slot 2 and slot 12.
l When slot 13 is divided, the two half-width slots are numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
l When slots 12 and 13 are not divided, the access capacity of each slot is 2.5 Gbit/s.
l When slots 12 and 13 are divided, the access capacity of each half-width slot is 1.25 Gbit/
s.

In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, slots 11–13 can be divided into half-width slots.

l When slot 11 is divided, the two half-width slots are numbered slot 1 and slot 11.
l When slot 12 is divided, the two half-width slots are numbered slot 2 and slot 12.
l When slot 13 is divided, the two half-width slots are numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
l When slots 11–13 are not divided, the access capacity of each slot is 2.5 Gbit/s.
l When slots 11–13 are divided, the access capacity of each half-width slot is 1.25 Gbit/s.

Figure 3-3 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A

XCS1A PIU XCS B


Slot Slot 11 PIU Slot 6 1.25Gbit/s

Slot 2/12 2.5Gbit/s Slot 7 1.25Gbit/s


Slot20
Slot 3/13 2.5Gbit/s Slot 8 1.25Gbit/s
FAN
Slot 4 2.5Gbit/s Slot 9 1.25Gbit/s

Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

Figure 3-4 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15

Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Slot 1/11 2.5Gbit/s Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 20 Slot 2/12 2.5Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s

Slot 3/13 2.5Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s


FAN Slot 4 Slot 9
2.5Gbit/s 622Mbit/s
Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

3.3 Slot Allocation


The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one tier, where 12 slots are present before the division
of slots. The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two tiers. The upper tier of the subrack, where four

3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

slots are present, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower tier of the subrack, where ten
slots are present before the division of slots (including slots 4 and 5), is the slot area for processing
boards.

Figure 3-5 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Figure 3-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack


Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 7


Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

Slots 12 and 13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack can be divided into two half-width slots
respectively. See Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 Slot 7


Slot 3 Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

Figure 3-7 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Figure 3-7 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Slot
XCS A 1 XCS B
Slot 11 Slot 6 1.25Gbit/s

Slot 2/12 2.5Gbit/s Slot 7 1.25Gbit/s


Slot20
Slot 3/13 2.5Gbit/s Slot 8 1.25Gbit/s

Slot 4 2.5Gbit/s Slot 9 1.25Gbit/s

Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10

When slots 12 and 13 are not divided, the access capacity of each slot is 2.5 Gbit/s. When slots
12 and 13 are divided, the access capacity of each slot is 1.25 Gbit/s.

The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack are allocated as follows:

l Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots 4–5
l Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6–9 and 12–13
l Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 6–9, 12–13, and 2–3
l Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

l Slots for PIU boards: slots 1 and 11


l Slots for the fan board: slot 20

Figure 3-8 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack. Figure 3-9 shows the slot
access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Figure 3-8 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack


Slot 14 Interface board
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15 Interface board
Slot 16 Interface board
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Interface board
Slot 11 Processing board Slot 6 Processing
board
Slot 20 Slot 12 Processing board Slot 7 Processing
board
Slot 13 Processing board Slot 8 Processing
board
FAN Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

Figure 3-9 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 2.5Gbit/s Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 20 Slot 12 2.5Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s


Slot 13 2.5Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s
FAN Slot 4 2.5Gbit/s Slot 9 622Mbit/s
Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

NOTE

Slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack can be divided. As shown in Figure 3-10, the divided slots
are in the dashed area. The slots in the left portion of the original slots are slots 1–3, and the slots in the
right portion of the original slots are slots 11–13. After the division of slots, the maximum access capacity
of each slot is 1.25 Gbit/s. See Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-10 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)
Slot 14 Interface board
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15 Interface board
Slot 16 Interface board
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17 Interface board
Slot 1 Slot 11 Processing Slot 6 Processing
board board
Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 Processing Slot 7 Processing
board board
Slot 3 Slot 13 Processing Slot 8 Processing
board board
FAN Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 1 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 11 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 6 622 Mbit/s

Slot 20 Slot 2 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 7 622 Mbit/s
Slot 3 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 8 622 Mbit/s
FAN Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 622 Mbit/s
Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack are allocated as follows:

l Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots 4–5
l Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6–9 and 11–13
l Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 1–9 and 11–13
l Slots for the interface boards: slots 14–17
l Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
l Slots for PIU boards: slots 18 and 19
l Slot for the fan board: slot 20

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-1 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing
boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards
of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Slots for Processing Boards Slots for Interface Boards

Slot 12 Slots 6 and 7

Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing
boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards
of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Slots for Slots for Interface Slots for Slots for Interface
Processing Boards Processing Boards
Boards Boards

Slot 2 Slot 14 Slot 3 Slot 16

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Slots for Slots for Interface Slots for Slots for Interface
Processing Boards Processing Boards
Boards Boards

Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 8 Slot 17

Slot 12 Slots 14 and 15 Slot 13 Slots 16 and 17

The corresponding interface boards for the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 can be housed only in
slots of even numbers.

The boards housed in slots 12 and 7 share the same interface board housed in slot 15, and the
boards housed in slots 13 and 8 share the same interface board housed in slot 17. Therefore,
when you configure the boards:
l If slot 12 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 7 cannot house
any board used with an interface board.
l If slot 13 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 8 cannot house
any board used with an interface board.

Boards and Their Valid Slots


Table 3-3 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

Board Full Name Valid Slots

Q2CXL16 STM-16 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5


SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units

Q2CXL4 STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5


SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units

Q2CXL1 STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5


SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units

N1SL16 (A) 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 12 and 13


board

N2SL16 (A) 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 12 and 13


board

N3SL16 (A) 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 12 and 13


board

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 12 and 13


board (with FEC)

N1SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface Slots 12 and 13


board

N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board Slots 12 and 13

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 2–3, 6–9, and 12–13
(half-width)

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 2–3, 6–9, and 12–13
(half-width)

R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 2–3, 6–9, and 12–13
(half-width)

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 2–3, 6–9, and 12–13
(half-width)

N1PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board (not Slots 12 and 13


used with the interface board)

N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board (not Slots 12 and 13


used with the interface board)

R1PD1A 32 x E1 processing board (half- Slots 2 and 12


width)

R1PD1B 32 x E1 processing board (half- Slots 2 and 12


width)

R2PD1 32 x E1/T1 hybrid processing Slots 2 and 12


board (half-width)

R1PL1A 16 x E1 processing board (half- Slots 6–9


width)

R1PL1B 16 x E1 processing board (half- Slots 6–9


width)

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1L75S 16 x EI 75-ohm interface board Slots 6 and 7


(half-width)

R1L12S 16 x E1 120-ohm interface board Slots 6 and 7


(half-width)

N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


board

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EFS4 4 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 12 and 13


processing board

N2EFS4 4 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


processing board

N1EMS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


transmission board

R1EFT4 4 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 2–3, 12–13 and 6–9 (622


transparent transmission board Mbit/s)
(half-width)

N1EFT8 (not used 8 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)


with the interface transparent transmission board
board)

N1EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


with the interface processing board
board)

N2EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


with the interface processing board
board)

N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent transmission Slots 12 and 13 (622 Mbit/s)


board (interfaces are available on
the front panel)

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


board

N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


board

N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing board Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing board Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1MST4 4-channel multiservice (SAN or Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


video service) transparent
transmission board

N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 12 and 13

N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 12 and 13


drop board (processing board)

N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 12 and 13


drop board (half-width)

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 12 and 13

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 12 and 13


multiplexing board

TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 12 and 13


multiplexing board

TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 12 and 13


drop multiplexing board

TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 12 and 13


drop multiplexing board

N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s convergence and Slots 12 and 13


processing board

R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm Slot 9


concatenation board

N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13

ROP Single wavelength long-haul Slot 103 (external)


board (remote pumping)

R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10

R2AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10

R1PIUA PIU board Slots 1 and 11

CAU CAU power monitoring board Slot 50

COA COA board Slots 101 and 102

N1BA2 2-channel optical booster Slots 12 and 13


amplifier board

N1BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1- Slots 12 and 13


channel preamplifier board

R1FAN Fan board Slot 20

R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Table 3-4 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-4 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

Q2CXL16 STM-16 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5


SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units

Q2CXL4 STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5


SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units

Q2CXL1 STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5


SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units

N1SL16 (A) 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 11–13


board

N2SL16 (A) 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 11–13


board

N3SL16 (A) 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 11–13


board

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 outband optical Slots 11–13


interface board (with FEC)

N1SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 11–13

N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 11–13

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 1–3 and 11–13 (for the
(half-width) board housed in any of slots 1–3
and 11–13, two optical interfaces
can be configured), slots 6–9 (for
the board housed in any of slots
6–9, one optical interface can be
configured)

3-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13
(half-width)

R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13
(half-width)

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13
(half-width)

N1SEP 8 x STM-1 (e) processing board Slots 12–13


(used with the interface board)

N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 (e) processing board Slots 11–13


(not used with the interface board)

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface Slots 11–13


board

N2SPQ4 4 x STM-1/E4 (e) processing Slots 12 and 13


board (used with the interface
board)

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface Slots 14 and 16


board

N1OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 14 and 16

N2OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 14 and 16

N1EU04 4 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface Slots 14 and 16


board

N2SLO1 8 x AU-3 high density access Slots 11–13


board

R1PL1A 16 x E1 interface and processing Slots 6–9


board (interfaces available on the
front panel)

R1PL1B 16 x E1 interface and processing Slots 6–9


board (interfaces available on the
front panel)

N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

N1PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board (not Slots 11–13


used with the interface board)

N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board (not Slots 11–13


used with the interface board)

N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

N1C34S 3 x 34M/45M electrical interface Slots 14 and 16


switching board

N1D34S 6 x 34M/45M electrical interface Slots 14–17


switching board

N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12–13

N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 14 and 16

N1PQ1A 63 x E1 75-ohm processing board Slots 11–13

N1PQ1B 63 x E1 120-ohm processing Slots 11–13


board

N1PQM 63 x E1 75-ohm or 120-ohm Slots 11–13


processing board

N2PQ1 63 x E1/T1 hybrid processing Slots 11–13


board

R2PD1 32 x E1/T1 hybrid processing Slots 1–3, 6–8 and 11–13


board

N1D75S 32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electrical Slots 14–17


interface switching board

N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 14–17


interface switching board

N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 14–17


interface board

N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s access and Slots 11–13


convergence board

N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s convergence and Slots 11–13


processing board

N1DM12 N x 64 kbit/s interface board Slots 14–17

N1EMS4 (used with 4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet Slots 12 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


the interface board) processing board

N1EMS4 (not used 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
with the interface
board)

N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N2EFS4 4 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


processing board

3-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N4EFS0 10M/100M Ethernet processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


board (used with the interface
board)

N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent transmission Slots 11–13 (622 Mbit/s)


board (interfaces available on the
front panel)

N1EFT8 (not used 8 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 11–13 (622 Mbit/s)


with the interface transparent transmission board
board)

N1EFT8 (used with 8 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


the interface board) transparent transmission board

R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm Slot 9


concatenation board

N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13

ROP Single wavelength long-haul Slot 103 (external)


board (remote pumping)

R2AUX System auxiliary interface board Slot 10

N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


board

N2EMR0 (used with 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet Slots 12–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


the interface board) processing board

N2EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


with the interface processing board
board)

R1EFT4 4 x FE processing board Slots 1–3, 11–13 and 6–9 (622


(interfaces available on the front Mbit/s)
panel)

N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface Slots 14 and 15


switching board

N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interface Slot 14


switching board

N1EFS0 (used with 10M/100M Ethernet processing Slots 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
the interface board) board

N2EFS0 (used with 10M/100M Ethernet processing Slots 12–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
the interface board) board

N1ETF8 8 x FE Ethernet electrical interface Slots 14–17


board

N1EFS4 4 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 11–13


processing board

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


transmission board

N1MST4 4-channel multiservice Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


transparent transmission board

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EMR0 (used with 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet Slots 12–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


the interface board) processing board

N1EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Slots 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


with the interface processing board
board)

N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet optical Slots 14–17


interface board

N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair Slots 14 and 16


interface switching board

N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 or 1 x STM-4 ATM Slots 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


processing board

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board Slots 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing board Slots 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing board Slots 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

CAU CAU power monitoring board Slot 50

COA COA board Slots 101–102

N1BA2 2-channel optical booster Slots 11–13


amplifier board

N1BPA Optical booster preamplifier Slots 11–13


board

R1PD1 32 x E1 processing board (half- Slots 1–3, 6–8 and 11–13


width)

R1FAN Fan board Slot 20

R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10

R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9

R1PIU PIU board Slots 18–19

N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 11–13


drop board

3-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13


drop board (half-width)

N1MR2C Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 14–17


drop board

N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 11–13

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 11–13

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 11–13


multiplexing board

TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 11–13


multiplexing board

TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 11–13


drop multiplexing board

TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 11–13


drop multiplexing board

3.4 Technical Specifications


The specifications of the subrack cover dimensions, weight and maximum power consumption.
Table 3-5 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

444 (W) x 262 (D) x 131 (H) 8 (the backplane, fans and two PIU
boards included)

Table 3-6 lists power consumption of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Table 3-6 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
Subrack Type Maximum Power Fuse Capacity
Consumption

OptiX OSN 1500A general 200 W 10 A


subrack

OptiX OSN 1500A enhanced 313 W 15 A


subrack

Table 3-7 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

444 (W) x 263 (D) x 221 (H) 9 (the backplane, fans and two PIU
boards included)

Table 3-8 lists power consumption of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

Table 3-8 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Subrack Type Maximum Power Fuse Capacity
Consumption

OptiX OSN 1500B general 280 W 10 A


subrack

OptiX OSN 1500B enhanced 400 W 15 A


subrack

3-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 4 Board List and Classification

4 Board List and Classification

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the appearance, barcode and classification of boards used for the OptiX
OSN systems.

4.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards


Different boards have different appearance and dimensions.
4.2 Description of the Barcode on the Board
The barcode on the front panel of the board indicates the board version, name and board features.
4.3 Board Classification
By function, the boards can be classified into SDH processing boards, PDH processing boards,
data processing boards, WDM processing boards and auxiliary boards.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Board List and Classification Hardware Description

4.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards


Different boards have different appearance and dimensions.

Table 4-1 lists the appearance figures and dimensions of boards for the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 4-1 Appearance and dimensions of boards for the OptiX OSN 1500

Item Appearance and Dimensions

Board
appearance

Board Integrated board of the Board housed in a divided Service interface


classificatio SCC, cross-connect and slot (PD1/PIUA/AUX/ board (D75S, for
n line units (CXL) EOW) example)

Height 262.05 111.8 262.05


(mm)

Depth (mm) 220 220 110

Width (mm) 25.4 25.4 22

Note: The figure in the right cell illustrates the three dimensions. The H
height and width are measured for the front panel and the depth is
measured for the printed circuit board (PCB). D W

CAUTION
Wear the anti-static wrist strap when holding the board with hands. Make sure that the anti-static
wrist strap is well grounded. Otherwise, the static discharge may cause damage to the board.

DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to laser beams launched from the optical interface board or optical
interfaces. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the eyes.

4-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 4 Board List and Classification

CAUTION
l Do not directly insert the attenuators into the level optical modules. If the attenuators are
required, use the attenautors at the ODF side.
l If a board requires an attenuator, insert the attenuator in the IN interface instead of the OUT
interface.
l When performing the loopback, use attenuators to prevent damage to the optical modules.

4.2 Description of the Barcode on the Board


The barcode on the front panel of the board indicates the board version, name and board features.
Two types of barcodes are used for the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500.
l 16-character manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code
l 20-character manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code

The barcode is stuck on the front panel of a board. Figure 4-1 shows a barcode with 16-character
manufacturing code.

Figure 4-1 Barcode of a board

Bar code

0364401055000015 -SSN3SL16A01
① ② ③ ④ 5

① Last 6-character serial code of BOM


② Internal code
③ Board version
④ Board name
5 Board feature code

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Board List and Classification Hardware Description

NOTE

For details on the board feature code, see the section that describes the board feature code for each board.

4.3 Board Classification


By function, the boards can be classified into SDH processing boards, PDH processing boards,
data processing boards, WDM processing boards and auxiliary boards.

4.3.1 SDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards at the STM-16, STM-4 and STM-1
levels.
4.3.2 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH processing boards at different rates and of different
impedance.
4.3.3 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards with the transparent transmission,
switching or RPR function.
4.3.4 Interface Boards and Switching Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the optical interface boards, electrical interface boards and
switching boards.
4.3.5 Cross-Connect Boards and SCC Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the integrated boards of the cross-connect, SCC and line units
at different rates.
4.3.6 Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface boards
and fan boards.
4.3.7 WDM Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM processing boards such as the optical add/drop
multiplexing boards and optical power amplifier boards.
4.3.8 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Board
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
4.3.9 Power Interface Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500A supports the UPM and R1PIUA. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports the
UPM and R1PIU.

4.3.1 SDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards at the STM-16, STM-4 and STM-1
levels.
Table 4-2 lists the SDH processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 4-2 SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name

N1SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 4 Board List and Classification

Board Full Name

N2SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N3SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N1SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N2SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N3SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board (with FEC)

N1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board

N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SLQ4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board

N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board

N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board

N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface board

N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board

N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board

R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board

N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board when interfaces are available


on the front panel

N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interface board

Table 4-3 lists the SDH processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 4-3 SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name

N1SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N2SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Board List and Classification Hardware Description

Board Full Name

N3SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N1SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N2SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N3SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interface board

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board (with FEC)

N1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board

N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board

N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board

N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board

N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface board

N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board

N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board

R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board

N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)

N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board when interfaces are available


on the front panel
8 x STM-1 line processing board when used with an interface
board

N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interface board

4.3.2 PDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH processing boards at different rates and of different
impedance.
Table 4-4 lists the PDH processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A.

4-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 4 Board List and Classification

Table 4-4 PDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Board Full Name

R1PL1 16 x E1 processing board N1PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board


(interfaces available on the
front panel)

R1PD1 32 x E1 processing board N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board


(interfaces available on the
front panel)

R2PD1 32 x E1/T1 processing board N1DXA DDN service convergence


board

Table 4-5 lists the PDH processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 4-5 PDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Board Full Name

R1PL1 16 x E1 processing board N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board


(interfaces available on the
front panel)

R1PD1 32 x E1 processing board N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board

R2PD1 32 x E1/T1 processing board N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board

N1PQ1 63 x E1 processing board N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board

N2PQ1 63 x E1 processing board N1DX1 DDN service access and


convergence board

N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board N1DXA DDN service convergence


board

N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical


processing board

N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical


processing board

N1PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board - -


(interfaces available on the front
panel)

4.3.3 Data Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards with the transparent transmission,
switching or RPR function.
Table 4-6 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-7


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Board List and Classification Hardware Description

Table 4-6 Data processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Board Full Name

N1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparent N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet convergence


transmission board (half-width) board

N1EFT8 8 x FE Ethernet transparent N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing


transmission board board

N1EFT8 8 x FE Ethernet transparent N1EMR0 4 x FE and 1 x GE Ethernet ring


A transmission board processing board

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent N2EMR0 4 x FE and 1 x GE Ethernet ring


transmission board processing board

N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing N1ADQ1 1 x STM-4 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N1EMS4 4 x GE Ethernet transparent N1MST4 4-port multi-service transparent


transmission and convergence transmission board
board

Table 4-7 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 4-7 Data processing boards for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Board Full Name

N1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparent N1EMS4 4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet


transmission board (half-width) transparent transmission and
convergence board

N1EFT8 8 x FE or 16 x FE Ethernet N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet convergence


transparent transmission board board

N1EFT8 8 x FE Ethernet transparent N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing


A transmission board board

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent N1EMR0 12 x FE and 1 x GE Ethernet


transmission board ring processing board

N1EFS0 8-port Fast Ethernet processing N2EMR0 12 x FE and 1 x GE Ethernet


board with Lanswitch ring processing board

N2EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processing N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

4-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 4 Board List and Classification

Board Full Name Board Full Name

N4EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processing N1ADQ1 1 x STM-4 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing


board with Lanswitch board

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing N1MST4 4-port multi-service transparent


board with Lanswitch transmission board

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing - -


board with Lanswitch

4.3.4 Interface Boards and Switching Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the optical interface boards, electrical interface boards and
switching boards.

Table 4-8 lists the interface boards and switching boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 4-8 Interface boards and switching boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A

Board Full Name

R1L12S 16 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical interface switching board

R1L75S 16 x E1 75-ohm electrical interface switching board

Table 4-9 lists the interface boards and switching boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 4-9 Interface boards and switching boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board Full Name Board Full Name

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 electrical interface N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm


board electrical interface switching
board

N1OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm


board (LC) electrical interface board

N2OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface N1EFF8 8 x 100M Ethernet optical


board (SC) interface board

N1D75S 32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electrical N1ETF8 8 x 100M Ethernet twisted


interface switching board pair interface board

N1MU04 4 x STM-1 electrical interface N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet


board twisted pair interface
switching board

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-9


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Board List and Classification Hardware Description

Board Full Name Board Full Name

N1D34S 6 x E3/T3 electrical interface N1DM12 DDN service interface board


switching board

N1C34S 3 x E3/T3 electrical interface N1TSB4 4-channel electrical


switching board interface switching board

N1EU04 4 x STM-1 electrical interface N1TSB8 8-channel electrical


board interface switching board

4.3.5 Cross-Connect Boards and SCC Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the integrated boards of the cross-connect, SCC and line units
at different rates.
Table 4-10 lists the cross-connect boards and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A
and the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 4-10 Cross-connect boards and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A and the
OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name

Q2CXL1 Integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect and line units at the
STM-1 level

Q2CXL4 Integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect and line units at the
STM-4 level

Q2CXL16 Integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect and line units at the
STM-16 level

4.3.6 Auxiliary Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface boards
and fan boards.
Table 4-11 lists the auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN
1500B.

Table 4-11 Auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Board Full Name

R1EOW Orderwire phone R1AUX/ System auxiliary


processing board R2AUX interface board

R1AMU Orderwire processing or R1FAN Fan board


alarm concatenation
board

4-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 4 Board List and Classification

4.3.7 WDM Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM processing boards such as the optical add/drop
multiplexing boards and optical power amplifier boards.

Table 4-12 lists the optical add/drop multiplexing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 4-12 Optical add/drop multiplexing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500A

Board Full Name Board Full Name

TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/drop N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop


multiplexing board multiplexing board

TN11CMR4 4-channel optical add/drop N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength


multiplexing board conversion board

MR2 2-channel optical add/drop TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier


multiplexing board board

MR4 4-channel optical add/drop N1FIB Filter isolating board


multiplexing board

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop - -


multiplexing board

Table 4-13 lists the optical add/drop multiplexing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 4-13 Optical add/drop multiplexing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board Full Name Board Full Name

TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/drop N1MR2B 2-channel optical add/drop


multiplexing board multiplexing board

TN11CMR4 4-channel optical add/drop N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop


multiplexing board multiplexing board

MR2 2-channel optical add/drop N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength


multiplexing board conversion board

MR4 42-channel optical add/drop TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier


multiplexing board board

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop N1FIB Filter isolating board


multiplexing board

4.3.8 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation


Board
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.

Table 4-14 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards supported by
the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-11


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Board List and Classification Hardware Description

Table 4-14 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards supported by the OptiX
OSN 1500A/B
Board Full Name

N1BPA Optical booster and pre-amplifier board

N1BA2 Optical booster amplifier board

N1COA/61COA/62COA Case-shaped optical amplifier

4.3.9 Power Interface Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500A supports the UPM and R1PIUA. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports the
UPM and R1PIU.
The UPM is an uninterruptible power module.
The R1PIUA is used for the OptiX OSN 1500A as the power interface board.
The R1PIU is used for the OptiX OSN 1500B as the power interface board.

4-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5 SDH Processing Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the SDH processing boards at the STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 levels.

5.1 SL1
This section describes the SL1, a 1 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.
5.2 SLQ1
This section describes the SLQ1, a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and parameters.
5.3 SLO1
This section describes the SLO1, an 8 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and parameters.
5.4 SLT1
This section describes the SLT1, a 12 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.
5.5 SEP1
This section describes the SEP1 board, in terms of the version, function, working principle, front
panel, and specifications.
5.6 SL4
This section describes the SL4, a 1 x STM-4 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.
5.7 SLD4
This section describes the SLD4, a 2 x STM-4 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.
5.8 SLQ4
This section describes the SLQ4, a 4 x STM-4 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.
5.9 SL16
This section describes the SL16, a 1 x STM-16 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

5.10 SL16A
This section describes the SL16A, a 1 x STM-16 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.
5.11 SF16
This section describes the SF16, a 1 x STM-16 optical interface board with the out-band FEC
function, in terms of the version, function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.1 SL1
This section describes the SL1, a 1 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.1.1 Version Description


The SL1 board has three versions: R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions lies
in the support for the TCM function. The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical interface board, which
is housed in a divided slot in a subrack.
5.1.2 Function and Feature
The SL1 is used to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
the STM-1 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.
5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SL1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, RST and so on.
5.1.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the N1L1/N2SL1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety
class label. On the front panel of the R1SL1, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.
5.1.5 Valid Slots
The slots valid for the SL1 vary with the version of the board.
5.1.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL1 indicates the optical interface type.
5.1.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SL1.
5.1.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SL1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.1.1 Version Description


The SL1 board has three versions: R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions lies
in the support for the TCM function. The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical interface board, which
is housed in a divided slot in a subrack.

Table 5-1 lists the details on the versions of the SL1 board.

Table 5-1 Version Description of the SL1

Item Description

Functional The SL1 has three versions, R1, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N2SL1 supports the TCM function. The N1SL1 and R1SL1 do not
support the TCM function. The R1SL1 is housed in a divided slot.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Item Description

Replaceability The versions cannot be replaced by each other.

5.1.2 Function and Feature


The SL1 is used to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
the STM-1 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.
Table 5-2 lists the functions and features of the SL1.

Table 5-2 Functions and features of the SL1


Function and SL1
Feature

Basic function Transmits and receives 1 x STM-1 optical signals.

Specification of Supports standard optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
the optical Ve-1.2 types. The optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 types
interface comply with ITU-T G.957 in features. The optical interface of the Ve-1.2
type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specification of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical Supports the usage and detection of the pluggable optical module SFP for
module easy maintenance.
The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of the
laser and the ALS function.

Service Supports the processing of the VC-12, VC-3 and VC-4 services.
processing

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-1 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Protection Supports the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection ring, linear MPS,
scheme SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SL1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, RST and so on.

Figure 5-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SL1.

Figure 5-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the SL1
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s
O/E I

High speed bus


....

....

Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
155Mbit/s I 155Mbit/s DCC
O/E SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1 units are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-5


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.1.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the N1L1/N2SL1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety
class label. On the front panel of the R1SL1, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SL1/N2SL1.

Figure 5-2 Front panel of the N1SL1/N2SL1

SL1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SL1

Figure 5-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the R1SL1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-7


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-3 Front panel of the R1SL1

SL1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

OUT IN

SL1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:
l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There is one pair of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SL1. Table 5-3 lists the type and
usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-3 Optical interfaces of the SL1


Interfaces on the Interface Type Usage
Front Panel

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

5.1.5 Valid Slots


The slots valid for the SL1 vary with the version of the board.
The slots valid for the SL1 are as follows:
l The R1SL1 can be housed in any of slots 2–3, 6–9 and 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack.

5-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l The N1SL1 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The N2SL1 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The R1SL1 can be housed in any of slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack.
l The N1SL1 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
l The N2SL1 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.1.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL1 indicates the optical interface type.

Table 5-4 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the SL1.

Table 5-4 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type

Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN1SL110, SSN2SL110 10 S-1.1

SSN1SL111, SSN2SL111 11 L-1.1

SSN1SL112, SSN2SL112 12 L-1.2

SSN1SL113, SSN2SL113 13 Ve-1.2

SSN1SL114, SSN2SL114 14 I-1

5.1.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SL1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SL1:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.1.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SL1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-5 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-9


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 5-5 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL1

Item Specification

Nominal 155.52 Mbit/s


bit rate

Line code NRZ

Optical I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2


interface
type

Optical MLM MLM MLM, SLM SLM SLM


source type

Working 1260–1360 1261–1360 1263–1360 1480–1580 1480–1580


wavelengt
h (nm)

Launched –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0


optical
power
(dBm)

Receiver –23 –28 –34 –34 –34


sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload –8 –8 –10 –10 –10


optical
power
(dBm)

Min. 8.2 8.2 10 10 10


extinction
ratio (dB)

Note: MLM indicates the multi-longitudinal mode and SLM indicates the single-longitudinal
mode.

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.

The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the N1SL1/N2SL1 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.0

The mechanical specifications of the R1SL1 are as follows:

5-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Board dmensions (mm): 111.8 (H) x 220 X (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 0.3

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1SL1/N2SL1 is
14 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the R1SL1 is 10.3 W.

5.2 SLQ1
This section describes the SLQ1, a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and parameters.

5.2.1 Version Description


The SLQ1 board has three versions, R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function. The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board,
which is housed in a divided slot in a subrack.
5.2.2 Function and Feature
The SLQ1 is used to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
the STM-1 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.
5.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SLQ1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.
5.2.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the N1SLQ1/N2SLQ1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser
safety class label.On the front panel of the R1SLQ1, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.
5.2.5 Valid Slots
The slots valid for the SLQ1 vary with the version of the board.
5.2.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLQ1 indicates the optical interface type.
5.2.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLQ1.
5.2.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SLQ1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.2.1 Version Description


The SLQ1 board has three versions, R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function. The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board,
which is housed in a divided slot in a subrack.

Table 5-6 lists the details on the versions of the SLQ1 board.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-11


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 5-6 Version Description of the SLQ1


Item Description

Functional The SLQ1 has three versions, R1, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N2SLQ1 supports the TCM function. The N1SLQ1 and R1SLQ1
do not support the TCM function. The R1SLQ1 is housed in a divided
slot.

Replaceability The versions cannot be replaced by each other.

5.2.2 Function and Feature


The SLQ1 is used to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
the STM-1 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.
Table 5-7 lists the functions and features of the SLQ1.

Table 5-7 Functions and features of the SLQ1


Function and SLQ1
Feature

Basic function Transmits and receives 4 x STM-1 optical signals.

Specification of Supports standard optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
the optical Ve-1.2 types. The optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 types
interface comply with ITU-T G.957 in features. The optical interface of the Ve-1.2
type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specification of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of
module the laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and detection of the pluggable optical module SFP for
easy maintenance.

Service Supports the processing of the VC-12, VC-3 and VC-4 services.
processing

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-1 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Protection Supports the two-fiber unidirectional MSP protection ring, linear MSP,
scheme SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.

5-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Function and SLQ1


Feature

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SLQ1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.
Figure 5-4 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SLQ1.

Figure 5-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLQ1
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s
O/E I

High speed bus


....

....

Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
155Mbit/s I 155Mbit/s DCC
O/E SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1 units are described below:

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-13


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.

5-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.


l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.2.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the N1SLQ1/N2SLQ1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser
safety class label.On the front panel of the R1SLQ1, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-5 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SLQ1/N2SLQ1.

Figure 5-5 Front panel of the N1SLQ1/N2SLQ1

SLQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4

SLQ1

Figure 5-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the R1SLQ1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-15


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-6 Front panel of the R1SLQ1

SLQ1

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

SLQ1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are four pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ1. Table 5-8 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-8 Optical interfaces of the SLQ1

Interfaces Interface Type Usage

IN1-IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

5.2.5 Valid Slots


The slots valid for the SLQ1 vary with the version of the board.

The slots valid for the SLQ1 are as follows:

l The R1SLQ1 can be housed in any of slots 2–3, 6–9 and 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack.

5-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l The N1SLQ1 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The N2SLQ1 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The R1SLQ1 can be housed in any of slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack.
l The N1SLQ1 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
l The N2SLQ1 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.2.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLQ1 indicates the optical interface type.

Table 5-9 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SLQ1.

Table 5-9 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type

Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN2SLQ110, 10 S-1.1
SSN1SLQ110

SSN2SLQ111, 11 L-1.1
SSN1SLQ111

SSN2SLQ112, 12 L-1.2
SSN1SLQ112

SSN2SLQ113, 13 Ve-1.2
SSN1SLQ113

SSN2SLQ114, 14 I-1
SSN1SLQ114

5.2.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLQ1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SLQ1:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.2.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SLQ1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-17


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-10 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1.

Table 5-10 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1

Item Specification

Nominal bit 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

Line code NRZ

Optical I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2


interface type

Optical source MLM MLM MLM, SLM SLM


type SLM

Working 1260–1360 1261–1360 1263–1360 1480–1580 1480–1580


wavelength
(nm)

Launched –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0


optical power
(dBm)

Receiver –23 –28 –34 –34 –34


sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload –8 –8 –10 –10 –10


optical power
(dBm)

Min. extinction 8.2 8.2 10 10 10


ratio (dB)

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.

The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the N1SLQ1/N2SLQ1 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.0

The mechanical specifications of the R1SLQ1 are as follows:

l Board dmensions (mm): 111.8 (H) x 220 X (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 0.4

5-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1SLQ1/
N2SLQ1 is 15 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the R1SLQ1 is 12 W.

5.3 SLO1
This section describes the SLO1, an 8 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and parameters.

5.3.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SLO1 board is N1.
5.3.2 Function and Feature
The SLO1 is used to access 8 x STM-1 optical signals, to perform the O/E conversion to the
signals, to insert or extract the overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.
5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SLO1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.
5.3.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SLO1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.
5.3.5 Valid Slots
If the SLO1 is housed in any of slots 12–13 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, one to eight
optical interfaces can be configured. If the SLO1 is housed in any of slots 11–13 of the OptiX
OSN 1500B subrack, one to eight optical interfaces can be configured.
5.3.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLO1 indicates the optical interface type.
5.3.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLO1.
5.3.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SLO1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.3.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SLO1 board is N1.

5.3.2 Function and Feature


The SLO1 is used to access 8 x STM-1 optical signals, to perform the O/E conversion to the
signals, to insert or extract the overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.

Table 5-11 lists the functions and features of the SLO1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-19


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 5-11 Functions and features of the SLO1 board

Function and SLO1


Feature

Basic function Receives and transmits 8 x STM-1 optical signals.

Specification of the Supports standard optical interfaces of the I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2
optical interface and Ve-1.2 types. The optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1 and
L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957 in features. The optical interface
of the Ve-1.2 type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specification of the The optical module is pluggable. When optical modules of other types
optical module are inserted, an alarm indicating the mismatch of the optical module is
reported.
Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
Supports the default off state of the laser. The laser is turned off before
the software finishes the initialization when the board is powered on.
Supports the usage and detection of the pluggable optical module SFP.
Supports the setting and query of the on/off state of the laser. An alarm
is generated when the laser is turned off. Performance events are
reported to indicate the performance of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the processing of the VC-12, VC-3 and VC-4 services.

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-1 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH
bytes.
If the two SCC boards are not in service, the SLO1 does not transmit
overhead bytes (long 0s) to the two SCC boards.
Supports one to eight channels of ECC communication.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance event maintenance of the equipment.

Protection scheme Supports the two-fiber unidirectional MSP protection ring, linear MSP,
SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of
the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SLO1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.

Figure 5-7 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SLO1.

5-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Figure 5-7 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLO1
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s
O/E I

High speed bus


....

....
Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
155Mbit/s I 155Mbit/s DCC
O/E SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1 units are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-21


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.3.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SLO1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.

Figure 5-8 shows the front panel of the SLO1.

5-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Figure 5-8 Front panel of the SLO1

SLO1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

OUT1 IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3 IN3 OUT4
IN4
OUT5 IN5
OUT6
IN6
OUT7 IN7
OUT8 IN8

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

SLO1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are eight pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO1. Table 5-12 lists the
type and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-12 Optical interfaces of the SLO1

Interfaces Interface Type Usage

IN1–IN8 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT8 LC Transmits optical signals.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-23


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

NOTE

The optical interfaces of the SLO1 are level optical interfaces and indented by 20 mm. The SLO1 board
can use the pluggable optical modules for easy maintenance.

WARNING
The optical interfaces of the SLO1 board are level optical interfaces. Thus, use the optical
attenuator only at the ODF side.

5.3.5 Valid Slots


If the SLO1 is housed in any of slots 12–13 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, one to eight
optical interfaces can be configured. If the SLO1 is housed in any of slots 11–13 of the OptiX
OSN 1500B subrack, one to eight optical interfaces can be configured.

5.3.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLO1 indicates the optical interface type.

Table 5-13 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SLO1.

Table 5-13 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type

Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN2SLO110 10 S-1.1

SSN2SLO111 11 L-1.1

SSN2SLO112 12 L-1.2

SSN2SLO113 13 Ve-1.2

SSN2SLO114 14 I-1

5.3.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLO1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SLO1:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.3.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SLO1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-14 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLO1.

Table 5-14 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLO1

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s

Line code NRZ

Optical interface I-1.1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2


type

Optical source type MLM MLM MLM, SLM SLM


SLM

Working 1261–1360 1261– 1263– 1480– 1480–


wavelength (nm) 1360 1360 1580 1580

Launched optical –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0


power (dBm)

Receiver –23 –28 –34 –34 –34


sensitivity (dBm)

Overload optical –8 –8 –10 –10 –10


power (dBm)

Min. extinction 8.2 8.2 10 10 10


ratio (dB)

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.

The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLO1 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.1

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the SLO1 is 26W.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-25


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

5.4 SLT1
This section describes the SLT1, a 12 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.4.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SLT1 board is N1.
5.4.2 Function and Feature
The SLT1 is used to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.
5.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SLT1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, RST and so on. The external services are accessed by the external interface boards EU08
and OU08 . The EU08 is an electrical interface board, and the OU08 is an optical interface board.
5.4.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SLT1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.
5.4.5 Valid Slots
The SLT1, housed in any of slots 12–13 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, one to twelve optical
interfaces can be configured. For the SLT1, housed in any of slots 11–13 of the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack, one to twelve optical interfaces can be configured.
5.4.6 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLT1.
5.4.7 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SLT1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.4.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SLT1 board is N1.

5.4.2 Function and Feature


The SLT1 is used to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals.

Table 5-15 lists the functions and features of the SLT1.

Table 5-15 Functions and features of the SLT1

Function and SLT1


Feature

Basic function Transmits and receives 12 x STM-1 optical signals.

5-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Function and SLT1


Feature

Specification of Supports S-1.1 standard optical interfaces compliant with ITU-T G.957
the optical in features.
interface

Specification of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of
module the laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and detection of the pluggable optical module SFP for
easy maintenance.

Service Supports the processing of the VC-12, VC-3 and VC-4 services.
processing

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-1 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.
Supports one to eight channels of ECC communication.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Protection Supports the two-fiber unidirectional MSP protection ring, linear MSP
scheme protection ring, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SLT1 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, RST and so on. The external services are accessed by the external interface boards EU08
and OU08 . The EU08 is an electrical interface board, and the OU08 is an optical interface board.
Figure 5-9 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SLT1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-27


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-9 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLT1
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s
O/E I

High speed bus


....

....
Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s 155Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
155Mbit/s I 155Mbit/s DCC
O/E SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1 units are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

5-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.4.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SLT1, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLT1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-29


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-10 Front panel of the SLT1

SLT1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6
OUT7 IN7
OUT8 IN8
OUT9 IN9 OUT10 IN10 OUT11 IN11 OUT12 IN12

SLT1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are 12 pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLT1. Table 5-16 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-16 Optical interfaces of the SLT1

Interface Interface Usage


Type

IN1-IN12 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT12 LC Transmits optical signals.

5-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

WARNING
The optical interfaces of the SLT1 board are level optical interfaces. Thus, use the optical
attenuator only at the ODF side.

5.4.5 Valid Slots


The SLT1, housed in any of slots 12–13 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, one to twelve optical
interfaces can be configured. For the SLT1, housed in any of slots 11–13 of the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack, one to twelve optical interfaces can be configured.

5.4.6 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLT1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SLT1:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.4.7 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SLT1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-17 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLT1.

Table 5-17 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLT1

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s

Line code NRZ

Optical interface type S-1.1

Optical source type MLM

Working wavelength (nm) 1261–1360

Launched optical power (dBm) –15 to –8

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –28

Overload optical power (dBm) –8

Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-31


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.

The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLT1 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.2

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the SLT1 is 15 W.

5.5 SEP1
This section describes the SEP1 board, in terms of the version, function, working principle, front
panel, and specifications.

5.5.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SEP1 board is N1.
5.5.2 Function and Feature
The SEP1 board processes STM-1 electrical signals.
5.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SEP1 board consists of the line interface module and CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on. The external services are accessed by the external interface
boards EU08 and OU08. The EU08 is an electrical interface board, and the OU08 is an optical
interface board.
5.5.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SEP1, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.
5.5.5 Valid Slots
When the SEP1 board is housed in any of slots 12–13 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, it
cannot be used with the interface board. In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, when interfaces are
available on the front panel of the SEP1 board, it can be housed in any of slots 11–13. When the
SEP1 board is used with the interface board, it is defined as SEP. In this case, it can be housed
in any of slots 12–13.
5.5.6 TPS Protection for the Board
The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed
services are switched to the protection board.
5.5.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SEP1.
5.5.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SEP1 cover the board dimensions, weight and power
consumption.

5-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.5.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SEP1 board is N1.
When interfaces are available on the front panel of the SEP1 (the logical board is displayed as
the SEP1 on the T2000), the SEP1 processes 2 x STM-1 electrical signals. In this case, the SEP1
is a 2 x STM-1 signal processing board. When the SEP1 is used with the interface board (the
logical board is displayed as the SEP on the T2000), the SEP1 processes 8 x STM-1 electrical
signals. In this case, the SEP1 is an 8 x STM-1 signal processing board. The physical boards for
the 2 x STM-1 signal processing board and 8 x STM-1 signal processing board are both the
SEP1. Thus, they are defined as the SEP1 when the logical boards are not differentiated.

5.5.2 Function and Feature


The SEP1 board processes STM-1 electrical signals.
Table 5-18 lists the functions and features of the SEP1.

Table 5-18 Functions and features of the SEP1


Function and SEP1
Feature

Basic function Processes 2 x STM-1 signals when interfaces are available on the front
panel.
Processes 8 x STM-1 signals when used with the interface board.

Specification of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of the
module laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the pluggable optical module SFP.

Service Supports the processing of the VC-12, VC-3 and VC-4 services.
processing

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-1 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Protection Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and the
scheme switching board.
Supports the two-fiber unidirectional MSP protection ring, linear MSP
protection, and SNCP.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-33


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Function and SEP1


Feature

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

When the SEP1 is used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching boards,
the access capabilities for the STM-1 signals are different. See Table 5-19.

Table 5-19 Access capabilities for the SEP1


Interface Board SEP1

None Accesses and processes 2 x STM-1 electrical signals, and does not
support the TPS protection.

EU08 Accesses and processes 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.

OU08 Accesses and processes 8 x STM-1 optical signals.

EU08+OU08 The hybrid usage is not supported.

EU08+TSB8 Accesses and processes 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and supports the
TPS protection for the SEP1 board.

CAUTION
When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the two interfaces on the front panel are invalid.
The hybrid usage of the EU08 and OU08 is not supported.

5.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SEP1 board consists of the line interface module and CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on. The external services are accessed by the external interface
boards EU08 and OU08. The EU08 is an electrical interface board, and the OU08 is an optical
interface board.
Figure 5-11 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SEP1.

5-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Figure 5-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the SEP1

Reference clock
155 MHz PLL Cross-connect unit

SDH overhead processing module

K1 and K2 K1 and K2
insertion/extration Cross-connect unit

high speed
bus
Cross-connect
SPI
155 Mbit/s CMI NRZ 155 Mbit/s RST MST MSA HPT unit A
Transfo Encode/ CDR high speed
Port 1 155 Mbit/s Decode 155 Mbit/s
rmer bus
Cross-connect
unit B
155 Mbit/s CMI NRZ 155 Mbit/s
Encode/ CDR
Port 2 155 Mbit/s Transfor
mer Decode 155 Mbit/s
DCC
SCC unit

Frame header Cross-connect


LOS
Communication and unit
Communication
control module SCC unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
+1.8 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

Figure 5-12 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SEP used with the EU08.

Figure 5-12 Block diagram for the working principle of the SEP used with the EU08

Reference clock
155 MHz PLL Cross-connect
unit
EU08
SPI
155 Mbit/s CMI 155 Mbit/s
Encode CDR SDH overhead processing
Transfo module
155 Mbit/s /
Port 1 rmer 155 Mbit/s
Decode K1 and K2 K1 and K2
insertion/extration Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s
Port 8 CMI Encode CDR
155 Mbit/s Transfo / 155 Mbit/s high speed
rmer Decode bus
Cross-connect unit
A
155 Mbit/s CMI 155 Mbit/s RST MST MSA HPT high speed
NRZ
Transfo Encode/ CDR bus
Cross-connect unit
Port 1 155 Mbit/s rmer Decode 155 Mbit/s
B

155 Mbit/s CMI 155 Mbit/s


NRZ
Port 2 CDR
155 Mbit/s Transfor Encode/ 155 Mbit/s
mer Decode DCC
SCC unit

Frame header
LOS Cross-connect unit
Communication and
control module Communication
SCC unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V

+1.8 V
converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

Figure 5-13 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SEP used with the OU08.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-35


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-13 Block diagram for the working principle of the SEP used with the OU08

Reference clock
155 MHz PLL Cross-connect unit
OU08

155 Mbit/s O/E NRZ 155 Mbit/s


CDR SDH overhead processing module
Port 1 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s
O/E K1 and K2 K1 and K2
S insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
I
Port 8 155 Mbit/s O/E NRZ 155 Mbit/s
CDR
155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s high speed
O/E bus
Cross-connect unit A

155 Mbit/s CMI


SPI NRZ 155 Mbit/s RST MST MSA HPT high speed
Port 1 Transfo CDR bus Cross-connect unit
Encode/
155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s B
rmer Decode
155 Mbit/s NRZ 155 Mbit/s
CMI CDR
Port 2 Encode/
155 Mbit/s Transfor 155 Mbit/s
mer Decode DCC
SCC unit

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
LOS
Laser shut down control module Communication
SCC unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
+1.8 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

The function modules are described below:

Line Interface Module and CDR Module


l In the receive direction, the received electrical signals (CMI code) are isolated through the
converter and then transmitted to the decoding unit. The CDR module then recovers the
data and clock signals after decoding.
l In the transmit direction, the SDH signals, which are processed by the overhead processing
unit, are transmitted to the encoding unit. After isolation by converter, 155 Mbit/s electrical
signals (CMI code) are output. The encoding and decoding unit monitors R_LOS alarms.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It also provides inloop and outloop
function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, MS_REI recovery,
MS_RDI and MS_AIS detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.

5-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MSA performs AUG assembly, AU-4 pointer generation,
AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect unit.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the paired slots constituting
the ADM when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter Module


It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48 V/ –60 V power supply to
the following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.5.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SEP1, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SEP1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-37


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-14 Front panel of the SEP1

SEP1

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

SEP1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:
l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are two pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1. Table 5-20 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

5-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Table 5-20 Electrical interfaces of the SEP1


Interface Interface Type Usage

IN1-IN2 75-ohm SMB Receives the STM-1 signals.

OUT1-OUT2 75-ohm SMB Transmits the STM-1 signals.

Note: The SEP1 board can also be used with interface boards EU08 and OU08. In this case,
the SEP1 is defined as the SEP. When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the two
interfaces on the front panel are invalid.

5.5.5 Valid Slots


When the SEP1 board is housed in any of slots 12–13 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, it
cannot be used with the interface board. In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, when interfaces are
available on the front panel of the SEP1 board, it can be housed in any of slots 11–13. When the
SEP1 board is used with the interface board, it is defined as SEP. In this case, it can be housed
in any of slots 12–13.

5.5.6 TPS Protection for the Board


The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed
services are switched to the protection board.
In this way, complex network-level protection, such as the MSP and SNCP, are not triggered,
but the reliability of the equipment can be ensured.
The OptiX OSN 1500B supports the TPS protection for the SEP1. The SEP1 board can be used
with the EU08 and TSB8 boards to realize the 1:1 TPS protection for 2 x STM-1 electrical
signals. The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the SEP1 board.

Protection Principle
Figure 5-15 shows the principle of the TPS protection for the SEP1 board.

Figure 5-15 Principle of the TPS protection for the SEP1


8×STM-1(e)
Switch control
signal

TSB8 EU08

2 1 1 2

Cross-
connect
and timing
board

SLOT 9/10

Protection Working
SEP SEP
Fail

SLOT12 SLOT13

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-39


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l Normal state: When the working boards are running normally, the control switch of the
EU08 is in position 1 and the EU08 directly accesses the service signals to the SEP1 board.
l Switching state: When a failure is detected on the working board, the working board housed
in each slot can be protected in the following ways.
– When the working board housed in slot 13 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
EU08 shifts from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the
TSB8 shifts from position 1 to position 2, and thus the working board housed in slot 13
is protected by the protection board housed in slot 12.

Hardware Configuration
Figure 5-16 shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1.

Figure 5-16 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15

Slot 16 EU08
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 20 Slot 12 Protection Slot 7

FAN Slot 13 Working Slot 8


Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

As shown in Figure 5-16, the protection board housed in slot 12 protects the board housed in
slot 13.

Table 5-21 lists the slots for the SEP1, EU08 and TSB8.

Table 5-21 Slots for the SEP1, EU08 and TSB8

Board Protection Group

SEP1 (working board) Slot 12

TSB8 Slot 14

SEP1 (working board) Slot 13

EU08 Slot 16

5.5.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SEP1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SEP1:

l J0

5-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.5.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SEP1 cover the board dimensions, weight and power
consumption.

Table 5-22 Technical specifications of the SEP1 board


Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155.520 Mbit/s

Line code Coded mark inversion (CMI), NRZ

Connector SMB

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SEP1 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.0

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the SEP1 is 17 W.

5.6 SL4
This section describes the SL4, a 1 x STM-4 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.6.1 Version Description


The SL4 board has three versions, R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions lies
in the support for the TCM function. The R1SL4 is an STM-1 optical interface board, which is
housed in a divided slot in a subrack.
5.6.2 Function and Feature
The SL4 board is used to receive and transmit 1 x STM-4 optical signals, to process the overhead
bytes, and to perform the MSP protection.
5.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SL4 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, RST and so on.
5.6.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the N1SL4/N2SL4, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety
class label.On the front panel of the R1SL4, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.
5.6.5 Valid Slots

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-41


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

The slots valid for the SL4 vary with the version of the board.
5.6.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL4 indicates the optical interface type.
5.6.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SL4.
5.6.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SL4 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.6.1 Version Description


The SL4 board has three versions, R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions lies
in the support for the TCM function. The R1SL4 is an STM-1 optical interface board, which is
housed in a divided slot in a subrack.

Table 5-23 lists the details on the versions of the SL4 board.

Table 5-23 Version Description of the SL4

Item Description

Functional The SL4 has three versions, R1, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N2SL4 supports the TCM function. The N1 and R1SL4 do not
support the TCM function. The R1SL4 is housed in a divided slot.

Replaceability The versions cannot be replaced by each other.

5.6.2 Function and Feature


The SL4 board is used to receive and transmit 1 x STM-4 optical signals, to process the overhead
bytes, and to perform the MSP protection.

The SL4 is used to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-4 signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals on the line.

Table 5-24 lists the functions and features of the SL4.

Table 5-24 Functions and features of the SL4

Function and SL4


Feature

Basic function Receives and transmits 1 x STM-4 optical signals, and processes 1 x
STM-4 standard or concatenation services.

Specification of Supports standard optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and
the optical Ve-4.2 types. The optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2
interface types comply with ITU-T G.957 in features. The optical interface of the
Ve-4.2 type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.

5-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Function and SL4


Feature

Specification of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical module The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of
the laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the pluggable optical module SFP.

Service Supports VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services and VC-4-4c concatenation
processing services.

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-4 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Protection scheme Supports the two-fiber MSP protection ring, four-fiber MSP protection
ring, linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the optical-path-shared MSP and SNCP protection.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SL4 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, RST and so on.
Figure 5-17 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SL4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-43


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-17 Block diagram for the working principle of the SL4
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
622Mbit/s I 622Mbit/s
O/E

High speed bus


....

....
Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
O/E I DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-4 units are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

5-44 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.6.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the N1SL4/N2SL4, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety
class label.On the front panel of the R1SL4, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-18 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SL4/N2SL4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-45


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-18 Front panel of the N1SL4/N2SL4

SL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SL4

Figure 5-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the R1SL4.

Figure 5-19 Front panel of the R1SL4

SL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT IN

SL4

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

5-46 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There is one pair of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SL4. Table 5-25 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-25 Optical interfaces of the SL4

Interface Interface Type Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

The SL4 board can use the pluggable optical modules for easy maintenance.

5.6.5 Valid Slots


The slots valid for the SL4 vary with the version of the board.

The slots valid for the SL4 are as follows:

l The R1SL4 can be housed in any of slots 2–3, 6–9 and 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack.
l The N1SL4 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The N2SL4 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The R1SL4 can be housed in any of slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack.
l The N1SL4 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
l The N2SL4 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.6.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL4 indicates the optical interface type.

Table 5-26 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SL4.

Table 5-26 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the SL4

Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN1SL410, SSN2SL410 10 S-4.1

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-47


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN1SL411, SSN2SL411 11 L-4.1

SSN1SL412, SSN2SL412 12 L-4.2

SSN1SL413, SSN2SL413 13 Ve-4.2

SSN1SL414, SSN2SL414 14 I-4

5.6.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SL4.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SL4:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.6.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SL4 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-27 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL4.

Table 5-27 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL4

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s

Line code NRZ

Optical interface I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2


type

Optical source MLM MLM SLM SLM SLM


type

Working 1261–1360 1274–1356 1280–1335 1480–1580 1480–1580


wavelength (nm)

Launched optical –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to +2 –3 to +2 –3 to +2


power (dBm)

Receiver –23 –28 –28 –28 –34


sensitivity (dBm)

5-48 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Item Specification

Overload optical –8 –8 –8 –8 –13


power (dBm)

Min. extinction 8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5


ratio (dB)

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.
The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the N1SL4/N2SL4 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.0

The mechanical specifications of the R1SL4 are as follows:


l Board dmensions (mm): 111.8 (H) x 220 X (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 0.5

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1SL4/N2SL4 is
15 W.
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the R1SL4 is 10 W.

5.7 SLD4
This section describes the SLD4, a 2 x STM-4 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.7.1 Version Description


The SLD4 board has three versions, R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function. The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-1 optical interface board,
which is housed in a divided slot in a subrack.
5.7.2 Function and Feature
The SLD4 is used to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-4 signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals on the line.
5.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SLD4 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module so on.
5.7.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser
safety class label.On the front panel of the R1SLD4, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-49


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

5.7.5 Valid Slots


The slots valid for the SLD4 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
5.7.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLD4 indicates the optical interface type.
5.7.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLD4.
5.7.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SLD4 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.7.1 Version Description


The SLD4 board has three versions, R1, N1 and N2. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function. The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-1 optical interface board,
which is housed in a divided slot in a subrack.

Table 5-28 lists the details on the versions of the SLD4 board.

Table 5-28 Version Description of the SLD4

Item Description

Functional The SLD4 has three versions, R1, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N2SLD4 supports the TCM function. The N1SLD4 and R1SLD4
do not support the TCM function. The SLD4 board of the R1SLD4 is
housed in a divided slot.

Replaceability The versions cannot be replaced by each other.

5.7.2 Function and Feature


The SLD4 is used to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-4 signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals on the line.

Table 5-29 lists the functions and features of the SLD4.

Table 5-29 Functions and features of the SLD4

Function and SLD4


Feature

Basic function Receives and transmits 2 x STM-4 optical signals, and processes 2 x
STM-4 standard or concatenation services.

Specification of Supports standard optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and
the optical Ve-4.2 types. The optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2
interface types comply with ITU-T G.957 in features. The optical interface of the
Ve-4.2 type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.

5-50 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Function and SLD4


Feature

Specifications of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical module The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of
the laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the pluggable optical module SFP.

Service Supports VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services and VC-4-4c concatenation
processing services.

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-4 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission or termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.
Supports one to two channels of ECC communication.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance event maintenance of the equipment.

Protection scheme Supports the two-fiber MSP protection ring, four-fiber MSP protection
ring, linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the optical-path-shared MSP and SNCP protection.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SLD4 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module so on.
Figure 5-20 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SLD4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-51


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-20 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLD4
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
622Mbit/s I 622Mbit/s
O/E

High speed bus


....

....
Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
O/E I DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-4 units are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

5-52 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.7.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser
safety class label.On the front panel of the R1SLD4, there are indicators, interfaces and barcode.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-53


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-21 Front panel of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4

SLD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2

SLD4

Figure 5-22 shows the appearance of the front panel of the R1SLD4.

Figure 5-22 Front panel of the R1SLD4

SLD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT IN
OUT IN

SLD4

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

5-54 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are two pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD4. Table 5-30 lists the
type and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-30 Optical interfaces of the SLD4


Interface Interface Type Usage

IN1-IN2 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SLD4 board can use the pluggable optical modules for easy maintenance.

5.7.5 Valid Slots


The slots valid for the SLD4 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
The slots valid for the SLD4 are as follows:
l The R1SLD4 can be housed in any of slots 2–3, 6–9 and 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack.
l The N1SLD4 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The N2SLD4 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
l The R1SLD4 can be housed in any of slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack. For the board housed in any of slots 1–3 and 11–13, two optical interfaces can be
configured. For the board housed in any of slots 6–9, one optical interface can be configured.
l The N1SLD4 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
l The N2SLD4 can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.7.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLD4 indicates the optical interface type.
Table 5-31 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SLD4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-55


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 5-31 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the SLD4

Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN1SLD410, 10 S-4.1
SSN2SLD410

SSN1SLD411, 11 L-4.1
SSN2SLD411

SSN1SLD412, 12 L-4.2
SSN2SLD412

SSN1SLD413, 13 Ve-4.2
SSN2SLD413

SSN1SLD414, 14 I-4
SSN2SLD414

5.7.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLD4.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SLD4:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.7.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SLD4 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-32 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLD4.

Table 5-32 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLD4

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s

Line code NRZ

Optical I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2


interface type

Optical source MLM MLM SLM SLM SLM


interface

5-56 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Item Specification

Working 1261–1360 1274–1356 1280–1335 1480–1580 1480–1580


wavelength
(nm)

Launched –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to +2 –3 to +2 –3 to +2


optical power
(dBm)

Receiver –23 –28 –28 –28 –34


sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload –8 –8 –8 –8 –13
optical power
(dBm)

Min. extinction 8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5


ratio (dB)

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.
The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.0

The mechanical specifications of the R1SLD4 are as follows:


l Board dmensions (mm): 111.8 (H) x 220 X (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 0.5

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1SLD4/N2SLD4
is 15 W.
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the R1SLD4 is 11 W.

5.8 SLQ4
This section describes the SLQ4, a 4 x STM-4 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.8.1 Version Description


The SLQ4 board has two versions, N1 and N2. The difference between the two versions lies in
the support for the TCM function.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-57


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

5.8.2 Function and Feature


The SLQ4 is used to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-4 signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals on the line.
5.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SLQ4 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.
5.8.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SLQ4, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.
5.8.5 Valid Slots
The SLQ4 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack. The SLQ4
can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
5.8.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLQ4 indicates the optical interface type.
5.8.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLQ4.
5.8.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SLQ4 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.8.1 Version Description


The SLQ4 board has two versions, N1 and N2. The difference between the two versions lies in
the support for the TCM function.
Table 5-33 lists the details on the versions of the SLQ4 board.

Table 5-33 Version Description of the SLQ4


Item Description

Functional The SLQ4 has two versions, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N2SLQ4 supports the TCM function. The N1SLQ4 does not support
the TCM function.

Replaceability The versions cannot be replaced by each other.

5.8.2 Function and Feature


The SLQ4 is used to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for
STM-4 signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to generate alarm signals on the line.
Table 5-34 lists the functions and features of the SLQ4.

5-58 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Table 5-34 Functions and features of the SLQ4


Function and SLQ4
Feature

Basic function Transmits and receives 4 x STM-4 optical signals.

Specification of Supports standard optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and
the optical Ve-4.2 types. The optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 types
interface comply with ITU-T G.957 in features. The optical interface of the Ve-4.2
type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specification of Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
the optical The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of
module the laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the pluggable optical module SFP .

Service Supports VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services and VC-4-4c concatenation
processing services.

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-4 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission or termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Protection Supports the two-fiber MSP protection ring, four-fiber MSP protection
scheme ring, linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.
Supports the optical-path-shared MSP and SNCP protection.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SLQ4 board consists of the O/E conversion module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.
Figure 5-23 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SLQ4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-59


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-23 Block diagram for the working principle of the SLQ4
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
PLL

622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s


O/E S CDR K1 and K2
K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect unit
P
622Mbit/s I 622Mbit/s
O/E

High speed bus


....

....
Cross-connect unit A

RST MST MSA HPT


High speed bus
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s Cross-connect unit B
O/E S CDR
P
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
O/E I DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header


LOS
Communication Cross-connect unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/ -60 V


DC/DC
+5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
backup power

PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-4 units are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then sends optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

CDR Module
l It recovers the data signal and the clock signal.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


l This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

5-60 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, multiplex section-
remote error indication (MS_REI) recovery, multiplex section-remote defect indication
(MS_RDI) and multiplex section-alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l MST provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MST it performs administration unit group (AUG) assembly,
AU-4 pointer generation, AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and embedded control channel (ECC) bytes between
the paired slots constituting the add/ drop multiplexer (ADM) when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power supply to the
following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3 V power supply.

5.8.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SLQ4, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-61


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-24 Front panel of the SLQ4

SLQ4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

OUT1
IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4

SLQ4

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are four pairs of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ4. Table 5-35 lists the
type and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-35 Optical interfaces of the SLQ4

Interface Interface Type Usage

IN1-IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SLQ4 board can use the pluggable optical modules for easy maintenance.

5-62 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.8.5 Valid Slots


The SLQ4 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack. The SLQ4
can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.8.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SLQ4 indicates the optical interface type.

Table 5-36 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SLQ4.

Table 5-36 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the SLQ4

Board Feature Code Optical interface type

SSN1SLQ410, 10 S-4.1
SSN2SLQ410

SSN1SLQ411, 11 L-4.1
SSN2SLQ411

SSN1SLQ412, 12 L-4.2
SSN2SLQ412

SSN1SLQ413, 13 Ve-4.2
SSN2SLQ413

SSN1SLQ414, 14 I-4
SSN2SLQ414

5.8.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SLQ4.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SLQ4:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.8.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SLQ4 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-37 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLQ4.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-63


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 5-37 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SLQ4


Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s

Line code NRZ

Optical interface I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2


type

Optical source MLM MLM SLM SLM SLM


type

Working 1261–1360 1274–1356 1280–1335 1480–1580 1480–1580


wavelength
(nm)

Launched –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to +2 –3 to +2 –3 to +2


optical power
(dBm)

Receiver –23 –28 –28 –28 –34


sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload optical –8 –8 –8 –8 –13


power (dBm)

Min. extinction 8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5


ratio (dB)

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.
The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLQ4 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.0

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the SLQ4 is 16 W.

5.9 SL16
This section describes the SL16, a 1 x STM-16 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.9.1 Version Description

5-64 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

The SL16 board has three versions, N1, N2 and N3. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function and AU-3 services.
5.9.2 Function and Feature
The SL16 board is used to receive and transmit 1 x STM-16 optical signals and to process the
overhead.
5.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SL16 board consists of the O/E conversion module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.
5.9.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SL16, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode, laser safety class label,
and APD alarm label.
5.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL16 board can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, and any
of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
5.9.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL16 indicates the optical interface type.
5.9.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SL16.
5.9.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SL16 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.9.1 Version Description


The SL16 board has three versions, N1, N2 and N3. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function and AU-3 services.
Table 5-38 lists the details on the versions of the SL16 board.

Table 5-38 Version Description of the SL16


Item Description

Functional The SL16 has three versions, N1, N2 and N3.


version

Difference The N1SL16 does not support the TCM function and AU-3 services.
The N2SL16 supports the TCM function, and it can be configured with
AU-3 services.
The TCM function and AU-3 services cannot be configured on the
N3SL16 at the same time.
The N3SL16 supports the board version replacement function.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-65


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Item Description

Replaceability The N1SL16 and N2SL16 cannot be replaced by each other.


When the TCM function and AU-3 services are not required, the N3SL16
can fully replace the N2SL16 and N1SL16.
The N3SL16 supports the board version replacement function and can
replace the N1SL16. After the N1SL16 is replaced, the N3SL16 is
consistent with the N1SL16 in configuration and service status.

5.9.2 Function and Feature


The SL16 board is used to receive and transmit 1 x STM-16 optical signals and to process the
overhead.
Table 5-39 lists the functions and features of the SL16.

Table 5-39 Functions and features of the SL16


Function SL16
and Feature

Basic function Transmits and receives 1 x STM-16 optical signals.

Specification Supports optical interfaces of the L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (with BA),
of the optical U-16.2Je (with BA and PA) types. The optical interface of the L-16.2 type
interface complies with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692 in features. The optical
interfaces of the L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (with BA), and U-16.2Je (with BA and
PA) comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the output of standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692.
The U-16.2Je optical interface can be directly connected to the DWDM
equipment.

Specification Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
of the optical The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of the
module laser and the ALS function.

Service Supports VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services and VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, and
processing VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Supports AU-3 services.

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH of the STM-16 signals.


processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events.


performance
event

Processing of Processes two sets of K bytes. One SL16 board supports a maximum of two
the K byte MSP protection rings.

5-66 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Function SL16
and Feature

Specifications Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
of the REG

Protection Supports the two-fiber MSP protection ring, four-fiber MSP protection ring,
scheme linear MSP protection, SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.
Supports the optical-path-shared MSP and SNCP protection.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

5.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SL16 board consists of the O/E conversion module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, RST and so on.

Figure 5-25 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SL16.

Figure 5-25 Block diagram for the working principle of the SL16
155 MHz 155 MHz Reference clock Cross-connect
PLL unit

K1 and K2
2.488 2.488 16 x 155 K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect
Gbit/s Gbit/s Mbit/s unit

O/E DEMUX
high speed bus Cross-connect
S unit A
P 2.488 16 x 155
2.488 I
Gbit/s Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Gbit/s high speed bus Cross-connect
O/E MUX unit B

DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header Cross-connect


LOS
Communication unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/-60 V


DC/DC
5V converter -48 V/-60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, it converts the received optical signals into electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-67


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l In the transmit direction, it converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals, and then
send optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function to shut down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module
l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel electrical signals, and recovery the clock signal at the same time.
l In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received
from the SDH overhead processing module into high rate electrical signals.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


It includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT, and provides outloop and inloop function.

RST
l In the receiving direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, and BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmitting direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section
path trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

MST
l In the receiving direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, MS_REI recovery,
MS_RDI and MS_AIS detection.
l In the transmitting direction, MST performs calculation and insertion of BIP-24, insertion
of MS_REI MS_RDI and MS_AIS.
l Provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receiving direction, MSA performs AU4 pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmitting direction, MSA performs AUG assembly, AU-4 pointer generation, and
AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.

5-68 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Tracing the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Implements laser controlling function.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the paired slots constituting
the ADM when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter Module


l This module provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power
supply to the following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. This module also provides
protection for the board +3.3V power supply.

5.9.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SL16, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode, laser safety class label,
and APD alarm label.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-26 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL16.

Figure 5-26 Front panel of the SL16

SL16

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

! APD
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm

OUT

IN

SL16

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-69


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There is one pair of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SL16. Table 5-40 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-40 Optical interfaces of the SL16

Interface Interface Type Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

5.9.5 Valid Slots


The SL16 board can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, and any
of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.9.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL16 indicates the optical interface type.

Table 5-41 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SL16.

Table 5-41 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type for the SL16

Board Feature Code Optical interface type

SSN1SL1601, SSN2SL1601 01 L-16.2

SSN1SL1602, 02 L-16.2Je
SSN2SL1602, SSN3SL1602

SSN1SL1603, 03 V-16.2Je
SSN2SL1603, SSN3SL1603

SSN1SL1604, 04 U-16.2
SSN2SL1604, SSN3SL1604

5-70 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.9.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SL16.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SL16:

l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.9.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SL16 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-42 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL16.

Table 5-42 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL16

Item Specification

Nominal 2488320 kbit/s


bit rate

Optical L-16.2 L-16.2Je V-16.2Je (BA) U-16.2Je (BA+PA)


Interface
Type

Optical SLM SLM SLM SLM


source type

Working 1500–1580 1530–1560 1530–1565 1550.12


wavelengt
h (nm)

Launched –2 to +3 5 to 7 –2 to +3 13 to 15 –2 to +3 15 to 18
optical (without (with BA) (without (with BA)
power BA) BA and
(dBm) PA)

Receiver –28 –28 –28 –28 –32 (with


sensitivity (without PA)
(dBm) PA and
BA)

Overload –9 –9 –9 –9 –10 (with


optical (without PA)
power PA and
(dBm) BA)

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-71


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Min. 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2


extinction
ratio (dB)

Note: The optical interface of the Le-16.2 type is the same as the optical interface of the
L-16.2Je type.
The launched optical power of the optical interface of the V-16.2Je type is measured when
the booster amplifer (BA) is added. The launched optical power of the optical interfaces of
the V-16.2Je and U-16.2Je types ranges from –2 dBm to –3 dBm when no BA is added.

Table 5-43 Specifications of the ITU-T G.692-compliant optical interfaces that output standard
wavelengths
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s

Dispersion limit (km) 170 640

Mean launched optical power (dBm) –2 to +3 –5 to –1

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –28 –28

Min. overload (dBm) –9 –9

Max. allowed dispersion (ps/nm) 3400 10880

Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.
The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SL16 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.1

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1SL16 is 20 W.
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N2SL16 is 20 W.
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N3SL16 is 22 W.

5-72 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.10 SL16A
This section describes the SL16A, a 1 x STM-16 optical interface board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.10.1 Version Description


The SL16A board has three versions, N1, N2, and N3. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function.
5.10.2 Function and Feature
The SL16A board is used to receive and transmit 1 x STM-16 optical signals, to process the
overhead bytes, and to perform the MSP protection.
5.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SL16A board consists of the O/E conversion module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, RST and so on.
5.10.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SL16A, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode, laser safety class label,
and APD alarm label.
5.10.5 Valid Slots
The SL16A can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack. The SL16A
can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
5.10.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL16A indicates the optical interface type.
5.10.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set the J0 parameter for the SL16A.
5.10.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SL16A cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.10.1 Version Description


The SL16A board has three versions, N1, N2, and N3. The difference among the three versions
lies in the support for the TCM function.
Table 5-44 lists the details on the versions of the SL16A board.

Table 5-44 Version Description of the SL16A


Item Description

Functional The SL16A has three versions, N1, N2, and N3.
version

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-73


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Item Description

Difference The N1SL16A does not support the TCM function and AU-3 services.
The N2SL16A supports the TCM function, and it can be configured with
AU-3 services.
The TCM function and AU-3 services cannot be configured on the
N3SL16A at the same time.
The N3SL16A supports the board version replacement function and can
replace the N3SL16A and N1SL16A. After the N3SL16A and N1SL16A
are replaced, the N3SL16A and N1SL16A are consistent with the
N1SL16A in configuration and service status.

Replaceability The N1SL16A and N2SL16A cannot be replaced by each other.


When the TCM function and AU-3 services are not required, the
N3SL16A can fully replace the N2SL16A and N1SL16A.

5.10.2 Function and Feature


The SL16A board is used to receive and transmit 1 x STM-16 optical signals, to process the
overhead bytes, and to perform the MSP protection.

Table 5-45 lists the functions and features of the SL16A.

Table 5-45 Functions and features of the SL16A

Function and SL16A


Feature

Basic function Transmit and receive 1 x STM-16 optical signals.

Specification of the Supports optical interfaces of the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2 types.
optical interface The optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692 in
features.
Supports the output of standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T
G.692 and can be directly connected to the DWDM equipment.

Specification of the Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
optical module The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of
the laser and the ALS function.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP pluggable optical
module.

Service processing Supports VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services and VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, and
VC-4-16c concatenation services.

Overhead Supports the processing of the SOH bytes of the STM-16 signals.
processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH
bytes. Supports the setting and query of the J0 bytes.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events.


performance event

5-74 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Function and SL16A


Feature

Processing of the K Processes two sets of the K bytes.


byte

Specifications of Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
the REG

Protection scheme Supports the two-fiber MSP protection ring, four-fiber MSP protection
ring, linear MSP protection, SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.
Supports the optical-path-shared MSP and SNCP protection.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports AU-3 services.

5.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SL16A board consists of the O/E conversion module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, RST and so on.

Figure 5-27 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the N1SL16A and N2SL16A.

Figure 5-27 Block diagram for the working principle of the N1SL16A and N2SL16A
155 MHz 155 MHz Reference clock Cross-connect
PLL unit

K1 and K2
2.488 2.488 16 x 155 K1 and K2 insertion/extration Cross-connect
Gbit/s Gbit/s Mbit/s unit

O/E DEMUX
high speed bus Cross-connect
S unit A
P 2.488 16 x 155
2.488 I
Gbit/s Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Gbit/s high speed bus Cross-connect
O/E MUX unit B

DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header Cross-connect


LOS
Communication unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/-60 V


DC/DC
5V converter -48 V/-60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-75


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-28 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the N3SL16A.

Figure 5-28 Block diagram for the working principle of the N3SL16A
155 MHz 155 MHz Reference clock Cross-connect
PLL unit

K1 and K2
2.488 2.488 16 x 155 Cross-connect
Gbit/s Gbit/s Mbit/s K1 and K2 insertion/extration unit

O/E DEMUX
high speed bus Cross-connect
S unit A
P 2.488 16 x 155
2.488 I
Gbit/s Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Gbit/s high speed bus Cross-connect
O/E MUX unit B

DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

IIC Frame header Cross-connect


LOS
Communication unit
and control Communication
Laser shut down SCC unit
module

+3.3 V Fuse -48 V/-60 V


DC/DC
5V converter -48 V/-60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, it converts the received optical signals into electrical signals.
l In the transmit direction, it converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals, and then
send optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function to shut down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module
l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel electrical signals, and recovery the clock signal at the same time.
l In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received
from the SDH overhead processing module into high rate electrical signals.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


It includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT, and provides outloop and inloop function.

RST
l In the receiving direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0) and mismatch detection, and BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmitting direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section
path trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

5-76 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

MST
l In the receiving direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, MS_REI recovery,
MS_RDI and MS_AIS detection.
l In the transmitting direction, MST performs calculation and insertion of BIP-24, insertion
of MS_REI MS_RDI and MS_AIS.
l Provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receiving direction, MSA performs AU4 pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmitting direction, MSA performs AUG assembly, AU-4 pointer generation, and
AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Tracing the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Implements laser controlling function.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the paired slots constituting
the ADM when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter Module


l This module provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48/–60 V power
supply to the following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. This module also provides
protection for the board +3.3V power supply.

5.10.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SL16A, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode, laser safety class label,
and APD alarm label.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-29 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL16A.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-77


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 5-29 Front panel of the SL16A

SL16A

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

! APD
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm

OUT

IN

SL16A

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There is one pair of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SL16A. Table 5-46 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

Table 5-46 Optical interfaces of the SL16A

Interface Interface Type Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

5-78 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.10.5 Valid Slots


The SL16A can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack. The SL16A
can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.10.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the SL16A indicates the optical interface type.
Table 5-47 lists the relation between the board feature code and optical interface type for the
SL16A.

Table 5-47 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type
Board Feature Code Optical Interface Type

SSN1SL16A01, 01 I-16
SSN2SL16A01,
SSN3SL16A01

SSN1SL16A02, 02 S-16.1
SSN2SL16A02,
SSN3SL16A02

SSN1SL16A03, 03 L-16.1
SSN2SL16A03,
SSN3SL16A03

SSN1SL16A04, 04 L-16.2
SSN2SL16A04,
SSN3SL16A04

5.10.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set the J0 parameter for the SL16A.
For details on the parameter, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.10.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SL16A cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-48 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL16A.

Table 5-48 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SL16A


Item Specification

Nominal 2488320 kbit/s


bit rate

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-79


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Optical I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2


Interface
Type

Optical MLM SLM SLM SLM


source type

Working 1266–1360 1260–1360 1280–1335 1500–1580


wavelength
(nm)

Launched –10 to –3 –5 to 0 –2 to +3 –2 to +3
optical
power
(dBm)

Receiver –18 –18 –27 –28


sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload –3 0 –9 –9
optical
power
(dBm)

Min. 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2


extinction
ratio (dB)

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.

The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SL16A are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg):
– N1SL16A and N2SL16A:1.1
– N3SL16A:0.9
l Weight (kg):1.1

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1SL16A and
N2SL16A are 20 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N3SL16A is 17 W.

5-80 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.11 SF16
This section describes the SF16, a 1 x STM-16 optical interface board with the out-band FEC
function, in terms of the version, function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

5.11.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SF16 board is N1.
5.11.2 Function and Feature
The SF16 board is used to receive and transmit one-channel OTU1 (2.666 Gbit/s, FEC) optical
signals and to process the overhead.
5.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SF16 consists of the O/E conversion module, MUX/DEMUX module, FEC module, SDH
overhead processing module and so on.
5.11.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the SF16, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.
5.11.5 Valid Slots
The SF16 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack. The SF16 can
be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
5.11.6 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SF16.
5.11.7 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the SF16 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

5.11.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SF16 board is N1.

5.11.2 Function and Feature


The SF16 board is used to receive and transmit one-channel OTU1 (2.666 Gbit/s, FEC) optical
signals and to process the overhead.
Table 5-49 lists the functions and features of the SF16.

Table 5-49 Functions and features of the SF16


Function and SF16
Feature

Basic function Receives and transmits 1 x OTU1 (2.666 Gbit/s, FEC) optical signals.
Supports the enabling or disabling of the FEC function.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-81


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Function and SF16


Feature

Specification Supports optical interfaces of the Ve-16.2c, Ve-16.2d, and Ve-16.2f types.
of the optical The optical interfaces of the Ve-16.2c, Ve-16.2d, and Ve-16.2f types
interface comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
The optical interface supports the output of standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the DWDM
equipment.

Specification Supports detection and query of the information on the optical module.
of the optical The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of the
module laser and the ALS function.

Service Supports VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services and VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, and
processing VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Supports AU-3 services.
The SF16 board encapsulates and encodes signals with the FEC function,
and processes overhead bytes, which comply with ITU-T G.709.

Overhead Supports the processing of the OTU, ODU, and OPU overhead bytes,
processing performance monitoring, and alarm detection, which comply with ITU-T
G.709.
Supports the processing of the SOH of the STM-16 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 bytes.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events.


performance Supports alarms and performance events related to the OTU, ODU, and
event OPU layers and the FEC function.

Processing of Processes two sets of K bytes. One SF16 board supports a maximum of two
the K byte MSP protection rings.

Specification Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
of the REG

Protection Supports the two-fiber MSP protection ring, four-fiber MSP protection
scheme ring, linear MSP protection, SNCP, SNCTP and SNCMP.
Supports the optical-path-shared MSP and SNCP protection.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for optical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.

5-82 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

5.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SF16 consists of the O/E conversion module, MUX/DEMUX module, FEC module, SDH
overhead processing module and so on.

Figure 5-30 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SF16.

Figure 5-30 Block diagram for the working principle of the SF16
155 MHz Reference clock
155 MHz PLL 155 MHz PLL Cross-connect unit

K1 and K2 insertion/extration K1 and K2


2.666 2.666 16x166 16x155 Cross-connect unit
Gbit/s Gbit/s Mbit/s Mbit/s
O/E DEMUX

S high speed bus


Cross-connect unit
P FEC
2.666
I 2.666 16x166 16x155 RST MST MSA HPT
Gbit/s Gbit/s Mbit/s Mbit/s high speed bus
Cross-connect unit
O/E MUX
DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead processing module

166 MHz PLL Frame header


IIC Communication Cross-connect unit
LOS and control Communication
Laser shut down module SCC unit

+3.3 V DC/DC Fuse -48 V/-60 V


5V converter -48 V/-60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

The function modules are described below:

O/E Conversion Module


l In the receive direction, the module converts the received 2.666 Gbit/s FEC optical signals
into electrical signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals,
and then send optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides function to shut down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module
l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel electrical signals, and recovers the clock signal at the same time.
l In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received
from the FEC module into high rate electrical signals.

FEC Module
l In the downstream direction, the FEC encoding and decoding module receives 2.488 Gbit/
s SDH signals, which are sent by the SDH overhead processing chip. After frame search,

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-83


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

FEC encoding, data packets encapsulation and scrambling, the 2.488 Gbit/s SDH signals
are converted to 2.666 Gbit/s signals and then transmitted to the MUX module.
l In the upstream direction, signals take the reverse process. The FEC encoding and decoding
module receives the 2.666 Gbit/s signals from the DEMUX module. After frame search,
FEC encoding, data packets encapsulation and scrambling in the FEC module, the 2.488
Gbit/s signals are recovered and then transmitted to SDH overhead processing chip. The
frame format of the 2.666 Gbit/s signals complies with ITU G.709.
l The FEC processing module connects to the communication and control unit through a
CPU bus. The CPU controls working modes of the FEC module by configuring the internal
register. The working mode can be regenerator mode, that is, REG mode. The CPU can
monitor the performance through the internal register.

SDH Overhead Processing Module


This module includes RST, MST, MSA and HPT. It also provides inloop and outloop function.

RST
l In the receive direction, RST performs frame alignment detection (A1, A2), regenerator
section trace recovery (J0), mismatch detection, BIP-8 errored block count.
l In the transmit direction, RST performs frame alignment insertion, regenerator section path
trace insertion, BIP-8 calculation and insertion.

MST
l In the receive direction, MST performs BIP-24 errored block count, MS_REI recovery,
MS_RDI and MS_AIS detection.
l In the transmit direction, MST performs BIP-24 calculation and insertion, MS_REI
MS_RDI and MS_AIS insertion.
l Provides extraction or insertion of K1 byte and K2 byte.

MSA
l In the receive direction, MSA performs AU4's pointer interpretation, LOP and AIS
detection, pointer justification.
l In the transmit direction, MSA performs AUG assembly, AU-4 pointer generation, and
AU_AIS generation.

HPT
l OH termination
l J1 path trace message recovery
l REI information recovering
l HP_RDI detection (path status monitoring)
l UNEQ and AIS detection (signal label monitoring)
l VC-4 BIP-8 errored block count

Communication and Control Module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.

5-84 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.


l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect unit.
l Controls the laser.
l Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the paired slots constituting
the ADM when the CXL is not online.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC Converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply to
the following voltages: + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V, + 5 V. It also provides protection for +3.3V power
supply.

5.11.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SF16, there are indicators, interfaces, barcode and laser safety class
label.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 5-31 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF16.

Figure 5-31 Front panel of the SF16

SF 16

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SF16

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-85


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:
l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There is one pair of optical interfaces on the front panel of the SF16. Table 5-50 lists the type
and usage of the optical interfaces.

NOTE

The SF16 uses the unpluggable optical module.

Table 5-50 Optical interfaces of the SF16


Interface Interface Usage
Type

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

5.11.5 Valid Slots


The SF16 can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack. The SF16 can
be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

5.11.6 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the SF16.
You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the SF16:
l J0
l J1
l C2

For details on the parameters, refer to F Board Configuration Reference.

5.11.7 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SF16 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Interface Specifications


Table 5-51 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the SF16.

5-86 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 5 SDH Processing Boards

Table 5-51 Specifications of the optical interfaces of the SF16


Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2666057.143 kbit/s

Service processing 1 x STM-16 standard services or concatenation services


capability

Line code NRZ

Optical Interface Ve-16.2c Ve-16.2d Ve-16.2f


Typea
FEC+BA(14) FEC+BA(17) FEC+BA(17)+RA+PA
+PA +PA

Optical source type SLM SLM SLM

Wavelength (nm) 1550.12

Launched optical –5 to –1 –5 to –1 –5 to –1
power (dBm)b

Launched optical 13–15 13–15 15–18


power (dBm)c

Receiver sensitivity –27.5 –27.5 –27.5


(dBm)b

Receiver sensitivity –37 –37 –42


(dBm)d

Overload optical –10 –10 –10


power (dBm)d

Min. extinction ratio 10 10 10


(dB)b

a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the specifications. For example, BA (14) indicates
that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA+PA+RA" indicates that the
optical interface is used with the FEC, PA, Raman amplifier and BA.
b: The specifications are for the optical module itself rather than for the amplifier.
c: The specifications are for the BA.
d: The specifications are for the PA.

Table 5-52 Specifications of the ITU-T G.692-compliant optical interfaces that output standard
wavelengths
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2666057.143 kbit/s

Dispersion limit (km) 640

Mean launched optical power (dBm) –5 to –1

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-87


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 SDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –28

Min. overload (dBm) –9

Max. allowed dispersion (ps/nm) 10880

Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2

Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1.
The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SF16 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.1

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the SF16 is 26 W.

5-88 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6 PDH Processing Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the PDH processing boards for the E1/T1, E3/T3, E4/STM-1, and DDN
signals.

6.1 PL1
This section describes the PL1, a 16 x E1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
working principle, front panel and specifications.
6.2 PD1
This section describes the PD1, a 32 x E1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
working principle, front panel and specifications.
6.3 PQ1
This section describes the PQ1, a 63 x E1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.4 PQM
This section describes the PQM, a 63 x E1/T1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.5 PL3
This section describes the PL3, a 3 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.6 PL3A
This section describes the PL3A, a 3 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.7 PD3
This section describes the PD3, a 6 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.8 PQ3
This section describes the PQ3, a 12 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.9 DX1

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

This section describes the DX1, a DDN interface convergence board, in terms of the version,
function, principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.10 DXA
This section describes the DXA, a DDN convergence board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.11 SPQ4
This section describes the SPQ4, a 4 x E1/STM-1 processing board, in terms of the version,
function, working principle, front panel and specifications.

6-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6.1 PL1
This section describes the PL1, a 16 x E1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
working principle, front panel and specifications.
6.1.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PL1 is R1.
6.1.2 Function and Feature
The PL1 is used to directly access and process E1 electrical signals, to process the overhead, to
report alarms and performance events and to provide the maintenance features.
6.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PL1 consists of the PPI, E1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.1.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PL1, there are indicators and interfaces.
6.1.5 Valid Slots
The PL1 can be housed in any of slots 6–9 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack or the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.
6.1.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the PL1 indicates the interface impedance type.
6.1.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PL1.
6.1.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PL1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.1.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PL1 is R1.

6.1.2 Function and Feature


The PL1 is used to directly access and process E1 electrical signals, to process the overhead, to
report alarms and performance events and to provide the maintenance features.

Table 6-1 lists the functions and features of the PL1.

Table 6-1 Functions and features of the PL1

Function and PL1


Feature

Basic function Processes 16 x E1 signals (interfaces available on the front panel).

Service processing Directly accesses and processes 16 x E1 electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Function and PL1


Feature

Overhead processing Supports the transparent transmission and termination of POH bytes
at the VC-12 level, such as the J2 byte.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management
performance event and maintenance of the equipment.

Maintenance feature Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of
the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting
services.
Supports the PRBS function.

6.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PL1 consists of the PPI, E1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
Figure 6-1 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PL1.

Figure 6-1 Block diagram for the functions of the PL1


1.5 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
2 MHz
PLL
OSC

E1 6 x 2 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit


LIU
E1 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I demapping module
E1 6 x 2 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
+2.5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

Figure 6-2 shows the block diagram of the E1 mapping/demapping.

6-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-2 Block diagram of the E1 mapping/demapping


E1 mapping/demapping

E1
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
Extraction

E1 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

The function modules are described as follows.

PPI
The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and outloop
function. This module:

l Encodes and decodes signals.


l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the PDH LOS signals.

E1 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream is inserted in a VC-12 container to be adapted so as to
be transported into the synchronous network for check of the PDH AIS.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-12) is formatted. The VC-12 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
VC-12 container and POH. The latter contains nine octets equally distributed within the
frame bytes for VC-12: V5, J2, N2, and K4.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-12s, which are located and isolated in TU-12. TU-PTR is processed. TU-
AIS and TU-LOP alarms are monitored. In the transmit direction, VC-12s are located
precisely and added with TU-PTR. 63 TUG-3s are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes
interleaving. The sequence is: TUG2->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l These two functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to interface
the “E1 mapping/demapping” block with the multiplex unit.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Control the indicator on the board.

DC/DC converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply to
the following voltages: + 2.5 V, + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V. In addition, protection for +3.3 V power are
provided to the board.

6.1.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PL1, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL1.

Figure 6-3 Front panel of the PL1

PL1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
1-16

6-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:
l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are 16 2mmHM interfaces on the front panel of the PL1. Table 6-2 lists the type and usage
of the interfaces.

Table 6-2 Interfaces on the front panel of the PL1


Interface Interface Usage
Type

1–8 2mmHM Receives the first eight channels (1–8) of E1 signals.

9–16 2mmHM Receives the last eight channels (9–16) of E1 signals.

6.1.5 Valid Slots


The PL1 can be housed in any of slots 6–9 of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack or the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.

6.1.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the PL1 indicates the interface impedance type.
Table 6-3 lists the relation between the board feature code and interface impedance type for the
PL1.

Table 6-3 Relation between the board feature code and the optical interface type of the PL1
Board Feature Code Interface Impedance Type

SSR1PL1A01 A01 75 ohms

SSR1PL1B01 B01 120 ohms

6.1.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PL1.
You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PL1:
l J2 byte

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l V5 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.1.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PL1 cover the optical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


Table 6-4 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the PL1.

Table 6-4 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the PL1


Interface Code Output Allowed Allowed Input
Type Signal Bit Input Input Jitter
Rate Frequency Attenuatio Tolerance
Deviation n

2048 kbit/s HDB3 Compliant with ITU-T G.703

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PL1 are as follows:
l Board dmensions (mm): 111.8 (H) x 220 X (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 0.5

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the PL1 is 7 W.

6.2 PD1
This section describes the PD1, a 32 x E1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
working principle, front panel and specifications.

6.2.1 Version Description


The PD1 has two versions, R1 and R2. The two versions have different functions.
6.2.2 Function and Feature
The PD1 is used to process E1 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance events,
and to provide the maintenance features and TPS protection.
6.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PD1 consists of the PPI, E1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.2.4 Front Panel

6-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

On the front panel of the PD1, there are indicators.


6.2.5 Valid Slots
The PD1 must be used with the L75S or L12S.
6.2.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the PD1 indicates the interface impedance type.
6.2.7 TPS Protection for the Board
The PD1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.2.8 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PD1.
6.2.9 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PD1 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.2.1 Version Description


The PD1 has two versions, R1 and R2. The two versions have different functions.

Table 6-5 lists the details on the versions of the PD1 board.

Table 6-5 Version Description of the PD1

Item Description

Functional The PD1 has two versions, R1 and R2.


version

Difference The R2PD1 supports the E13 function and the board version replacement
function.

Replaceability The R1PD1A can be replaced by the R2PD1A.


The R1PD1B can be replaced by the R2PD1B.

6.2.2 Function and Feature


The PD1 is used to process E1 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance events,
and to provide the maintenance features and TPS protection.

Table 6-6 lists the functions and features of the PD1.

Table 6-6 Functions and features of the PD1

Function PD1
and
Feature R1PD1 R2PD1

Basic Processes 32 x E1 Processes 32 x E1 signals.


function signals.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Function PD1
and
Feature R1PD1 R2PD1

Service Accesses and Accesses and processes 32 x E1 electrical signals when


processing processes 32 x E1 used with the interface board.
electrical signals Supports the E13 function, which is used to converge
when used with the E1 services into E3 services.
interface board.

Overhead Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes at the
processing VC-12 level, such as the J2 byte.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Maintenanc Supports inloop and outloop for the electrical interfaces.


e feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

Protection Supports the TPS protection when used with the electrical interface switching
scheme board.

6.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PD1 consists of the PPI, E1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
Figure 6-4 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PD1.

6-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-4 Block diagram for the functions of the PD1

1.5 MHz/ Reference clock


155 MHz Cross-connect unit
2 MHz
PLL
OSC

E1 6 x 2 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit


LIU
E1 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I demapping module
E1 6 x 2 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
+2.5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

Figure 6-5 shows the block diagram of the E1mapping/ demapping.

Figure 6-5 Block diagram of the E1 mapping/ demapping


E1 mapping/demapping

E1
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
Extraction

E1 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

The function modules are described as follows.

PPI
The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and outloop
function. This module:

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-11


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l Encodes and decodes signals.


l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the PDH LOS signals.

E1 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream is inserted in a VC-12 container to be adapted so as to
be transported into the synchronous network for check of the PDH AIS.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-12) is formatted. The VC-12 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
VC-12 container and POH. The latter contains nine octets equally distributed within the
frame bytes for VC-12: V5, J2, N2, and K4.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-12s, which are located and isolated in TU-12. TU-PTR is processed. TU-
AIS and TU-LOP alarms are monitored. In the transmit direction, VC-12s are located
precisely and added with TU-PTR. 63 TUG-3s are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes
interleaving. The sequence is: TUG2->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT
l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l These two functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to interface
the “E1 mapping/demapping” block with the multiplex unit.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Control the indicator on the board.

DC/DC converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply to
the following voltages: + 2.5 V, + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V. In addition, protection for +3.3 V power are
provided to the board.

6-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6.2.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PD1, there are indicators.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PD1.

Figure 6-6 Front panel of the PD1

PD1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the front panel of the PD1.

In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, the PD1 is used with the L75S or L12S, which provides 75-
ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. For details, see the sections that describe the L75S and L12S.

In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PD1 is used with the D75S or D12S, which provides 75-
ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. For details, see the sections that describe the D75S and D12S.

6.2.5 Valid Slots


The PD1 must be used with the L75S or L12S.

In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, the PD1 can be housed in any of half-width slots 2 and 12.
Table 6-7 lists the valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the L75S and L12S.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-13


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-7 Valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the L75S and L12S in the OptiX
OSN 1500A subrack
Valid Slot for the PD1 Corresponding Slot for the L75S and L12S

Slot 12 Slot 7 (1–16 channels services)


Slot 6 (17–32 channels services)

NOTE

Slot 2 can house a protection board of the TPS protection. The board housed in slot 2 protects the board
housed in slot 12.

In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PD1 can be housed in any of slots 1–3, 6–8 and 11–13.
Table 6-8 lists the valid slots for the PD1 and the corresponding slots for the D75S and D12S.

Table 6-8 Valid slots for the PD1 and corresponding slots for the D75S and D12S in the OptiX
OSN 1500B subrack
Valid Slot for the PD1 Corresponding Slot for the D75S and
D12S

Slot 2 Slot 14

Slot 3 Slot 16

Slots 7 and 12 Slot 15

Slots 8 and 13 Slot 17

NOTE

l Boards housed in slots 7 and 12 share the interface board housed in slot 15. The boards housed in slots
7 and 12 cannot be used with the interface board housed in slot 15 to add or drop services at the same
time.
l Boards housed in slots 8 and 13 share the interface board housed in slot 17. The boards housed in slots
8 and 13 cannot be used with the interface board housed in slot 17 to add or drop services at the same
time.
l Slot 1 can house a protection board of the TPS protection. The board housed in slot 1 protects the boards
housed in slots 2 and 3.
l Slot 11 can house a protection board of the TPS protection. The board housed in slot 11 protects the
boards housed in slots 12 and 13.
l Slot 6 can house a protection board of the TPS protection. The board housed in slot 6 protects the boards
housed in slots 7 and 8.

6.2.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the PD1 indicates the interface impedance type.
Table 6-9 lists the relation between the board feature code and interface impedance type for the
PD1.

6-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Table 6-9 Relation between the board feature code and the interface impedance type
Board Feature Code Interface Impedance
Type

SSR1PD1A01, A01 75 ohms


SSR2PD1A01

SSR1PD1B01, B01 120 ohms


SSR2PD1B01

6.2.7 TPS Protection for the Board


The PD1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Protection Principle
In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, used with the L75S or L12S, two PD1 boards can get 1:1
TPS protection. Figure 6-7 shows the principle for the TPS protection of the PD1.

Figure 6-7 Principle of the TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack

S S
L L
O O
E1protection bus
T T
6 7
L75S
L75S

E1
service
S S bus
L L
O O
T T
2 12

Fail
Protection

Working

PD1 PD1
Detect
TPS
board fault
switching
Cross-connect and timing control bus
board

In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, used with the D75S or D12S, the PD1 boards can get 1:N
(1≤2) TPS protection. Figure 6-8 shows the principle of the TPS protection for the PD1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-15


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-8 Principle of the TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

E1 protection bus

D75S

D75S
E1
service bus

Fail

Protection Working Working


PD1 PD1 PD1

Detect
board fault TPS switching
control bus
Cross-connect and
timing board

When detecting a failure in the working PD1 board, the cross-connect board issues a command
to switch the services from the faulty PD1 to the protection PD1. In this way, services are
protected.

Hardware Configuration
In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, PD1 boards can be housed in the half-width slots to realize
the 1:1 TPS protection. Figure 6-9 shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for
the PD1.

Figure 6-9 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A
subrack
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6 L75S(17~32)

Slot 20 PD1(P) Slot 2 Slot 12 PD1(W) Slot 7 L75S(1~16)


Slot 3 Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

Table 6-10 shows the slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX
OSN 1500B subrack.

6-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Table 6-10 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack

Board Protection Group Before Protection Group After the Slot


the Slot Division Division

PD1 Slot 6 Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6


(protection)

PD1 Slots 7 and 8 Slots 2 and Slots 12 and Slots 7 and


(working) 3 13 8

D75S/D12S Slots 15 and 17 Slots 14 and Slots 15 and Slots 15


16 17 and 17

The two protection groups that contain slots 6 and 11 share the protection bus and thus cannot
coexist. Before the slots are divided, the OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection
for E1 services. After the slots are divided, the OptiX OSN 1500B supports a maximum of two
TPS protection groups for E1 services.

6.2.8 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PD1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PD1:

l J2 byte
l V5 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.2.9 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PD1 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


The L12S, L75S, D12S or D75S board provides electrical interfaces for the PD1. For
specifications of the electrical interfaces, see the sections that describe these boards.

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PD1 are as follows:

l Board dmensions (mm): 111.8 (H) x 220 X (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg)
– 0.5 (R1PD1)
– 0.56 (R2PD1)

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-17


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the R1PD1 is 15 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the R2PD1 is 10.4 W.

6.3 PQ1
This section describes the PQ1, a 63 x E1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.

6.3.1 Version Description


The PQ1 has two versions, R1 and R2. The two versions have different functions.
6.3.2 Function and Feature
The PQ1 can be used to process E1 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance
events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
6.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PQ1 consists of the PPI, E1/T1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module and so
on.
6.3.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PQ1, there are indicators.
6.3.5 Valid Slots
The PQ1 must be used with the D75S, D12S or D12B.
6.3.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the PQ1 indicates the interface impedance type.
6.3.7 TPS Protection for the Board
The PQ1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.3.8 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PQ1.
6.3.9 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PQ1 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.3.1 Version Description


The PQ1 has two versions, R1 and R2. The two versions have different functions.

Table 6-11 lists the details on the versions of the PQ1 board.

Table 6-11 Version Description of the PQ1

Item Description

Functional The PQ1 has two versions, N1 and N2.


version

6-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Item Description

Difference The N2PQ1 supports the E13 function and the board version replacement
function.
The N2PQ1 does not perform the tributary timing function.

Replaceability When the tributary timing function is not required, the N1PQ1A can be
replaced by the N2PQ1A.
When the tributary timing function is not required, the N1PQ1B can be
replaced by the N2PQ1B.

NOTE: When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PQ1A (75 ohms) and PQ1B (100
ohms/120 ohms) are called PQ1 hereinafter.

6.3.2 Function and Feature


The PQ1 can be used to process E1 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance
events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
Table 6-12 lists the functions and features of the PQ1.

Table 6-12 Functions and features of the PQ1


Function PQ1
and
Feature N1PQ1 N2PQ1

Basic Processes 63 x E1 Processes 63 x E1 signals.


function signals.

Service Processes 63 x E1 Processes 63 x E1 electrical signals when used with an


processing electrical signals interface board.
when used with an Supports the E13 function, which is used to converge
interface board. E1 services into E3 services.

Overhead Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes at the
processing VC-12, such as the J2 byte.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performanc maintenance of the equipment.
e event

Maintenan Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


ce feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-19


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Function PQ1
and
Feature N1PQ1 N2PQ1

Protection Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board.
scheme When the working board is the PQ1, the protection board can be the PQM. In
this way, the hybrid protection is provided.

6.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PQ1 consists of the PPI, E1/T1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module and so
on.
Figure 6-10 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PQ1.

Figure 6-10 Block diagram for the functions of the PQ1


1.5 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
2 MHz
PLL
OSC

6 x 1.5 Mbit/s/
E1/T1 6 x 2 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
E1/T1 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I 6 x 1.5 Mbit/s/ demapping module
E1/T1 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU 6 x 2 Mbit/s
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
+2.5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

Figure 6-11 shows the block diagram of the E1/T1 mapping/ demapping.

6-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-11 Block diagram of the E1/T1 mapping/ demapping


E1/T1 mapping/demapping

E1/T1
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
Extraction

E1/T1 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

The function modules are described as follows.

PPI
The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and outloop
function. This module:

l Encodes and decodes signals.


l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the PDH LOS signals.

E1/T1 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 2 Mbit/s (1.5 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a VC-12 container to be
adapted so as to be transported into the synchronous network for check of the PDH AIS.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-12) is formatted. The VC-12 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
VC-12 container and POH. The latter contains nine octets equally distributed within the
frame bytes for VC-12: V5, J2, N2, and K4.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-12s, which are located and isolated in TU-12. TU-PTR is processed. TU-
AIS and TU-LOP alarms are monitored. In the transmit direction, VC-12s are located
precisely and added with TU-PTR. 63 TUG-3s are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes
interleaving. The sequence is: TUG2->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-21


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l These two functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to interface
the “E1/T1 mapping/demapping” block with the multiplex unit.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Control the indicator on the board.

DC/DC converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply to
the following voltages: + 2.5 V, + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V. In addition, protection for +3.3 V power are
provided to the board.

6.3.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PQ1, there are indicators.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ1.

6-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-12 Front panel of the PQ1

PQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

PQ1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the front panel of the PQ1.

The D75S, D12S or D12B provides 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1/T1 interfaces for the PQ1. For
details, see the sections that describe the D75S, D12S and D12B.

6.3.5 Valid Slots


The PQ1 must be used with the D75S, D12S or D12B.

The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PQ1 board.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-23


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PQ1 can be housed in any of slots 11–13, and must be
used with the D75S, D12S or D12B.

Table 6-13 lists the valid slots for the PQ1 and corresponding slots for the D75S, D12S or D12B.

Table 6-13 Valid slots for the PQ1 and corresponding slots for the D75S, D12S or D12B in the
OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

Valid Slot for the PQ1 Corresponding Slot for the D75S, D12S
and D12B

Slot 12 Slot 14 (1–32 channels of services)


Slot 15 (33–63 channels of services)

Slot 13 Slot 16 (1–32 channels of services)


Slot 17 (33–63 channels of services)

NOTE

l Slot 11 can house a protection board of the TPS protection. The board housed in slot 11 protects the
boards housed in slots 12 and 13.
l If the interface board for the boards housed in slot 12 and 13 is the D12B, the boards housed in slot 12
and 13 cannot get the TPS protection.

6.3.6 Board Feature Code


The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the PQ1 indicates the interface impedance type.

Table 6-14 lists the relation between the board feature code and interface impedance type for
the PQ1.

Table 6-14 Relation between the board feature code and the interface impedance type

Board Feature Code Interface Impedance


Type

SSN1PQ1A01, A01 75 ohms


SSN2PQ1A01

SSN1PQ1B01, B01 120 ohms


SSN2PQ1B01

6.3.7 TPS Protection for the Board


The PQ1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Protection Principle
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, used with the D75S or D12S, the PQ1 can get the 1:N (≤2)
TPS protection. Figure 6-13 shows the principle of the TPS protection for the PQ1.

6-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-13 Principle of the TPS protection for the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

S S S S
E1 L L L L
protection bus O O O O
T T T T
14 15 16 17

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S
E1
service
bus

SLOT SLOT SLOT


11 12 13

Fail
Protection

Working

Working

Detect
board fault
TPS switching
Cross-connect and control bus
timing board

When detecting a failure in the working PD1 board, the cross-connect board issues a command
to switch the services from the faulty PQ1 to the protection PQ1. In this way, services are
protected.

Hardware Configuration
Table 6-15 lists the slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.

Table 6-15 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack
Working Board Protection Board Slot

PQ1A (75 ohms) PQ1A (75 ohms) Slot 11 can house the protection board.
The board in slot 11 protects the boards
PQ1B (120 ohms) PQ1B (120 ohms) or in slots 12 and 13. Figure 6-14 shows the
PQM slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS
protection for the PQ1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-25


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-14 Slot configuration for 1:2 TPS protection of the PQ1

Slot 14 D75S
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15 D75S

Slot 16 D75S
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17 D75S
Slot 11 Protection Slot 6
Slot 20 Slot 12 Working Slot 7
Slot 13 Working Slot 8
FAN
Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

6.3.8 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PQ1.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PQ1:

l J2 byte
l V5 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.3.9 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PQ1 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


The D75S, D12S or D12B provides electrical interfaces for the PQ1. For the specifications of
these electrical interfaces, see the section that describes the D75S, D12S or D12B.

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PQ1 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.0

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1PQ1 is 19 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N2PQ1 is 13 W.

6-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6.4 PQM
This section describes the PQM, a 63 x E1/T1 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.

6.4.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PQM board is N1.
6.4.2 Function and Feature
The PQM is used to process E1/T1 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance
events, and to provide the maintenance features and TPS protection.
6.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PQM consists the PPI, E1/T1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.4.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PQM, there are indicators.
6.4.5 Valid Slots
The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PQM board.
6.4.6 TPS Protection for the Board
The PQM supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.4.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PQM.
6.4.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PQM cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.4.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PQM board is N1.

6.4.2 Function and Feature


The PQM is used to process E1/T1 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance
events, and to provide the maintenance features and TPS protection.

Table 6-16 lists the functions and features of the PQM.

Table 6-16 Functions and features of the PQM

Function PQM
and Feature

Basic function Processes 63 x E1/T1 signals.

Service The PQM accesses and processes 63 x E1/T1 electrical signals when used
processing with the interface board. Each channel can be configured as E1 or T1.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-27


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Function PQM
and Feature

Overhead Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the POH bytes at
processing the VC-12 level, such as the J2 byte.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

Protection When used with the interface board, the PQM supports the TPS protection.
scheme When the working board is the PQ1, the protection board can be the PQM.
In this way, the hybrid protection is provided.

6.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PQM consists the PPI, E1/T1 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
Figure 6-15 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PQM.

Figure 6-15 Block diagram for the functions of the PQM


1.5 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
2 MHz
PLL
OSC

6 x 1.5 Mbit/s/
E1/T1 6 x 2 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
E1/T1 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I 6 x 1.5 Mbit/s/ demapping module
E1/T1 155 Mbit/s High speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU 6 x 2 Mbit/s
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
+2.5 V converter -48 V/ -60 V
DC/DC
+1.8 V converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

6-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-16 shows the block diagram of the E1/T1 mapping/ demapping.

Figure 6-16 Block diagram of the E1/T1 mapping/ demapping


E1/T1 mapping/demapping

E1/T1
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4)
Extraction

E1/T1 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

The function modules are described as follows.

PPI
The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and outloop
function. This module:

l Encodes and decodes signals.


l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the PDH LOS signals.

E1/T1 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 2 Mbit/s (1.5 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a VC-12 container to be
adapted so as to be transported into the synchronous network for check of the PDH AIS.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-12) is formatted. The VC-12 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
VC-12 container and POH. The latter contains nine octets equally distributed within the
frame bytes for VC-12: V5, J2, N2, and K4.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-12s, which are located and isolated in TU-12. TU-PTR is processed. TU-
AIS and TU-LOP alarms are monitored. In the transmit direction, VC-12s are located
precisely and added with TU-PTR. 63 TUG-3s are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes
interleaving. The sequence is: TUG2->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-29


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l These two functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to interface
the “E1/T1 mapping/demapping” block with the multiplex unit.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Control the indicator on the board.

DC/DC converter
It provides the board with required DC voltages. It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply to
the following voltages: + 2.5 V, + 3.3 V, + 1.8 V. In addition, protection for +3.3 V power are
provided to the board.

6.4.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PQM, there are indicators.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-17 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQM.

6-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-17 Front panel of the PQM

PQM

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

PQM

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:
l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the front panel of the PQM.
The D12S or D12B provides 100-ohm T1/E1 interfaces for the PQM. For details, see the sections
that describe the D12S and D12B.

6.4.5 Valid Slots


The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PQM board.
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PQM can be housed in any of slots 11–13, and must be
used with the D12S or D12B.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-31


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-17 lists the valid slots for the PQM and corresponding slots for the D12S and D12B.

Table 6-17 Valid slots for the PQM and corresponding slots for the D12S and D12B in the OptiX
OSN 1500B subrack
Valid Slot for the PQM Corresponding Slot for the D12S and
D12B

Slot 12 Slot 14 (1–32 channels of services)


Slot 15 (33–63 channels of services)

Slot 13 Slot 16 (1–32 channels of services)


Slot 17 (33–63 channels of services)

NOTE

l Slot 11 can house a protection board of the TPS protection. The board housed in slot 11 protects the
boards housed in slots 12 and 13.
l If the interface board for the boards housed in slots 12 and 13 is the D12B, the boards housed in slots
12 and 13 cannot get the TPS protection.

6.4.6 TPS Protection for the Board


The PQM supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Protection Principle
In the OptiX OSN 1500B, used with the D12S, the PQM can be configured into one 1:N (N≤
2) TPS protection group. Figure 6-18 shows the principle of the TPS protection for the PQM.

6-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-18 Principle of the TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

S S S S
E1/T1 L L L L
protection bus O O O O
T T T T
14 15 16 17

D12S
D12S

D12S
D12S
E1/T1
service
bus

SLOT SLOT SLOT


11 12 13

Fail
Protection

Working

Working

Detect
board fault
TPS switching
Cross-connect and control bus
timing board

When detecting a fault in the working PQM board, the cross-connect board issues a command
to switch the services from the faulty PQM to the protection PQM. In this way, services are
protected.

Hardware Configuration
Table 6-18 lists the slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.

Table 6-18 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack
Working Protection Board Slot
Board

PQM (E1) PQM (E1) Slot 11 can house the protection board. The board
in slot 11 protects the boards in slots 12 and 13.
PQM (T1) PQM (T1) Figure 6-19 shows the slot configuration for the
1:2 TPS protection for the PQM.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-33


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-19 Slot configuration for the 1:2 TPS protection for the PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack

Slot 14 D12S
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15 D12S

Slot 16 D12S
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17 D12S
Slot 11 Protection Slot 6
Slot 20 Slot 12 Working Slot 7
Slot 13 Working Slot 8
FAN
Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

6.4.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PQM.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PQM:

l J2 byte
l V5 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication
l Path service type

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.4.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PQM cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


The D12S or D12B provides electrical interfaces for the PQM. For the specifications of the
electrical interfaces, see the sections that describe the D12S and D12B.

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PQM are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.0

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the PQM is 22 W.

6-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6.5 PL3
This section describes the PL3, a 3 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.

6.5.1 Version Description


The PL3 has two versions, N1 and N2. The two versions have different functions.
6.5.2 Function and Feature
The PL3 can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance
events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
6.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PL3 consists the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.5.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PL3, there are indicators.
6.5.5 Valid Slots
The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PL3 board.
6.5.6 TPS Protection for the Board
The PL3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.5.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PL3.
6.5.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PL3 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.5.1 Version Description


The PL3 has two versions, N1 and N2. The two versions have different functions.

Table 6-19 lists the details on the versions of the PL3 board.

Table 6-19 Version description of the PL3

Item Description

Functional The PL3 has two versions, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N1PL3 does not support the E13/M13 function.


The N2PL3 supports the E13/M13 function.
The N2PL3 supports the board version replacement function and can
replace the N1PL3. After the N1PL3 is replaced, the N2PL3 is consistent
with the N1PL3 in configuration and service status.

Replaceability The N2PL3 can fully replace the N1PL3.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-35


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

6.5.2 Function and Feature


The PL3 can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and performance
events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
Table 6-20 lists the functions and features of the PL3.

Table 6-20 Functions and features of the PL3


Function and PL3
Feature

Basic function Processes 3 x E3/T3 signals.

Service processing Accesses and processes 3 x E3/T3 electrical signals.

Overhead Supports the setting and query of all path overhead bytes at the VC-3
processing level.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance event maintenance of the equipment.

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

Protection scheme Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and the
switching board.

6.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PL3 consists the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
Figure 6-20 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PL3.

6-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-20 Block diagram for the functions of the PL3


34 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
45 MHz
PLL
OSC

6 x 34 Mbit/s/ High
E3/T3 6 x 45 Mbit/s 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
E3/T3 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I 6 x 34 Mbit/s/ demapping module High
E3/T3 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU 6 x 45 Mbit/s
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
converter -48 V/ -60 V
+1.8 V DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

OSC: Oscillator PPI: PDH physical interface

Figure 6-21 shows the block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping.

Figure 6-21 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping


E3/T3 mapping/demapping

E3/T3
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
extraction

E3/T3 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPA: Low order Path Adaptation LPT: Low order Path Termination
HPA: High order Path Adaptation HPT: High order Path Termination

The function modules are described as follows.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-37


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

PPI
l The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and
outloop function. This module:
l Encodes and decodes signals.
l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the A_LOS alarm.

E3/T3 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 45 Mbit/s (34 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C3 container to be adapted
so as to be transported into the synchronous network.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-3) is formatted by lower order path termination (LPT).
l The VC-3 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 us interval (for example,
one STM–1 period), and consists of the VC-3 container and POH. The latter contains nine
octets equally distributed within the frame bytes for VC-3: J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4, F3, K3,
and N1.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-3s, which are located and isolated in TU-3. TU-PTR is processed. In the
transmit direction, VC-3s are located precisely and added with TU-PTR. Three TUG-3s
are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The sequence is: TU-3->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT
l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l The functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to connect the
interface conversion module.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

6-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

DC/DC converter module


Through the DC/ DC converting module, different direct currents are provided to each chip on
the board. Two direct currents are provided: +1.8 V and +3.3 V. In addition, protection for +3.3
V power are provided to the board.

6.5.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PL3, there are indicators.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-22 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL3.

Figure 6-22 Front panel of the PL3

PL3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

PL3

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-39


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the front panel of the PL3.
The C34S, an electrical interface switching board, provides the E3/T3 interfaces for the PL3.
For details, see the section that describes the D34S.

6.5.5 Valid Slots


The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PL3 board.
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PL3 can be housed in any of slots 12–13, and must be
used with the C34S.
Table 6-21 lists the valid slots for the PL3 and corresponding slots for the C34S.

Table 6-21 Valid slots for the PL3 and corresponding slots for the C34S in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack
Valid Slot for the PL3 Corresponding Slot for the C34S

Slot 12 Slot 14

Slot 13 Slot 16

6.5.6 TPS Protection for the Board


The PL3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Protection Principle
In the OptiX OSN 1500B, used with the C34S and TSB8, the PL3 can be configured into one
1:1 TPS protection group. Figure 6-23 shows the principle of the TPS protection for the PL3.

6-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-23 Principle of the TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
3 xE3/T3

Switch
control
TSB8 C34S signal

1 2
3 2 1
Cross-
connect
and timing
board

SLOT 4/5

Protection Working
PL3 PL3

Fail
SLOT12 SLOT13

l Normal state
When the working boards are running normally, the control switch of the C34S is in position
1 and services are directly accessed to the PL3 board.
l Switching state
When the working board detects a fault and requires a switching, the control switch of the
C34S is shifted to position 2 and the control switch of the TSB8 is shifted to a corresponding
position. In this way, the protection board protects the faulty working board.

Hardware Configuration
Table 6-22 lists the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.

Table 6-22 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack
Working Protection Board Slot
Board

PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3)/PD3 (E3) If the working board is the PL3, the PD3
can be the protection board. Figure 6-24
PL3 (T3) PL3 (T3)/PD3 (T3) shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS
protection for the PL3.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-41


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-24 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15

Slot 16 C34S
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 7
Protection
FAN Slot 13 Working Slot 8
Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

As shown in Figure 6-24, the protection board housed in slot 12 protects the board housed in
slot 13.

Table 6-23 lists the slots for the PL3, C34S and TSB8.

Table 6-23 Slots for the PL3, C34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

Board Protection Group

PL3 (working) Slot 13

PL3/PD3 (protection) Slot 12

TSB8 Slot 14

C34S Slot 16

6.5.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PL3.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PL3:

l J1 byte
l C2 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication
l Path service type

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.5.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PL3 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Electrical Interface Specifications


The C34S provides electrical interfaces for the PL3. For the specifications of the electrical
interfaces, see the section that describes the C34S.

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PL3 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.0

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1PL3 is 15 W.
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N2PL3 is 12 W.

6.6 PL3A
This section describes the PL3A, a 3 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.

6.6.1 Version Description


The PL3A board has two functional versions, N1 and N2. The difference between the two
versions lies in the support for the E13/M13 function.
6.6.2 Function and Feature
The PL3A can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and
performance events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
6.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PL3A consists of the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.6.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PL3A, there are indicators and interfaces.
6.6.5 Valid Slots
The PL3A can be housed in different slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B
subracks
6.6.6 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PL3A.
6.6.7 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PL3A cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.6.1 Version Description


The PL3A board has two functional versions, N1 and N2. The difference between the two
versions lies in the support for the E13/M13 function.
Table 6-24 lists the details on the versions of the PL3A board.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-43


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-24 Version description of the PL3A

Item Description

Functional The PL3A has two versions, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N1PL3A does not support the E13/M13 function.


The N2PL3A supports the E13/M13 function.
The N2PL3A supports the board version replacement function and can
replace the N1PL3A. After the N1PD3A is replaced, the N2PD3A is
consistent with the N1PD3A in configuration and service status.

Replaceability The N2PD3A can fully replace the N1PD3A.

6.6.2 Function and Feature


The PL3A can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and
performance events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.

Table 6-25 lists the functions and features of the PL3A.

Table 6-25 Functions and features of the PL3A

Function and PL3A


Feature

Basic function Processes 3 x E3/T3 signals.


The N2PL3A supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1
services into E3 services.
The N2PL3A supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1
services into T3 services.

Service Accesses and processes 3 x E3/T3 electrical signals.


processing

Overhead Supports the setting and query of all path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
processing

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

6-44 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PL3A consists of the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.

Figure 6-25 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PL3A.

Figure 6-25 Block diagram for the functions of the PL3A


34 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
45 MHz
PLL
OSC

6 x 34 Mbit/s/ High
E3/T3 6 x 45 Mbit/s 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
E3/T3 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I 6 x 34 Mbit/s/ demapping module High
E3/T3 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU 6 x 45 Mbit/s
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
converter -48 V/ -60 V
+1.8 V DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

OSC: Oscillator PPI: PDH physical interface

Figure 6-26 shows the block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping.

Figure 6-26 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping


E3/T3 mapping/demapping

E3/T3
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
extraction

E3/T3 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPA: Low order Path Adaptation LPT: Low order Path Termination

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-45


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

HPA: High order Path Adaptation HPT: High order Path Termination

The function modules are described as follows.

PPI
l The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and
outloop function. This module:
l Encodes and decodes signals.
l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the A_LOS alarm.

E3/T3 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 45 Mbit/s (34 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C3 container to be adapted
so as to be transported into the synchronous network.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-3) is formatted by lower order path termination (LPT).
l The VC-3 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 us interval (for example,
one STM–1 period), and consists of the VC-3 container and POH. The latter contains nine
octets equally distributed within the frame bytes for VC-3: J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4, F3, K3,
and N1.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-3s, which are located and isolated in TU-3. TU-PTR is processed. In the
transmit direction, VC-3s are located precisely and added with TU-PTR. Three TUG-3s
are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The sequence is: TU-3->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT
l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l The functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to connect the
interface conversion module.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.

6-46 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC converter module


Through the DC/ DC converting module, different direct currents are provided to each chip on
the board. Two direct currents are provided: +1.8 V and +3.3 V. In addition, protection for +3.3
V power are provided to the board.

6.6.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PL3A, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-27 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL3A.

Figure 6-27 Front panel of the PL3A

PL3A

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3

PL3A

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-47


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
There are three pairs of 75-ohm unbalanced interfaces, which are of the SMB type.

6.6.5 Valid Slots


The PL3A can be housed in different slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B
subracks

The PL3A can be housed in any of slots 12–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

The PL3A can be housed in any of slots 11–13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

6.6.6 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PL3A.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PL3A:

l J1 byte
l C2 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication
l Path service type

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.6.7 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PL3A cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


Table 6-26 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the PL3A.

Table 6-26 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the PL3A

Interface Type Code Output Allowed Allowed Input


Signal Bit Input Input Jitter
Rate Frequency Attenuatio Tolerance
Deviation n

34368 kbit/s HDB3 Compliant with ITU-T G.703

6-48 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Interface Type Code Output Allowed Allowed Input


Signal Bit Input Input Jitter
Rate Frequency Attenuatio Tolerance
Deviation n

44736 kbit/s B3ZS Compliant with ITU-T G.703

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PL3A are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.0

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1PL3A is 15 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N2PL3A is 12 W.

6.7 PD3
This section describes the PD3, a 6 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.

6.7.1 Version Description


The PD3 board has two functional versions, N1 and N2. The difference between the two versions
lies in the support for the E13/M13 function.
6.7.2 Function and Feature
The PD3 can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and
performance events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
6.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PD3 consists of the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.7.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PD3, there are indicators.
6.7.5 Valid Slots
The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PD3 board.
6.7.6 TPS Protection for the Board
The PD3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.7.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PD3.
6.7.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the PD3 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-49


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

6.7.1 Version Description


The PD3 board has two functional versions, N1 and N2. The difference between the two versions
lies in the support for the E13/M13 function.
Table 6-27 lists the details on the versions of the PD3 board.

Table 6-27 Version Description of the PD3


Item Description

Functional The PD3 has two functional versions, N1 and N2.


version

Difference The N1PD3 does not support the E13/M13 function.


The N2PD3 supports the E13/M13 function.
The N2PD3 supports the board version replacement function and can
replace the N1PD3. After the N1PD3 is replaced, the N2PD3 is consistent
with the N1PD3 in configuration and service status.

Replaceability The N2PD3 can fully replace the N1PD3.

6.7.2 Function and Feature


The PD3 can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and
performance events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
Table 6-28 lists the functions and features of the PD3.

Table 6-28 Functions and features of the PD3


Function PD3
and Feature

Basic function Processes 6 x E3/T3 signals.

Service Accesses and processes 6 x E3/T3 electrical signals.


processing The N2PD3 supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1
services into E3 services.
The N2PD3 supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1
services into T3 services.

Overhead Supports the setting and query of all path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
processing

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

6-50 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Function PD3
and Feature

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

Protection Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface and switching
scheme boards.

6.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PD3 consists of the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
Figure 6-28 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PD3.

Figure 6-28 Block diagram for the functions of the PD3


34 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
45 MHz
PLL
OSC

6 x 34 Mbit/s/ High
E3/T3 6 x 45 Mbit/s 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
E3/T3 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I 6 x 34 Mbit/s/ demapping module High
E3/T3 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU 6 x 45 Mbit/s
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
converter -48 V/ -60 V
+1.8 V DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

OSC: Oscillator PPI: PDH physical interface

Figure 6-29 shows the block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-51


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-29 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping


E3/T3 mapping/demapping

E3/T3
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
extraction

E3/T3 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPA: Low order Path Adaptation LPT: Low order Path Termination
HPA: High order Path Adaptation HPT: High order Path Termination

The function modules are described as follows.

PPI
l The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and
outloop function. This module:
l Encodes and decodes signals.
l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the A_LOS alarm.

E3/T3 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 45 Mbit/s (34 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C3 container to be adapted
so as to be transported into the synchronous network.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-3) is formatted by lower order path termination (LPT).
l The VC-3 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 us interval (for example,
one STM–1 period), and consists of the VC-3 container and POH. The latter contains nine
octets equally distributed within the frame bytes for VC-3: J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4, F3, K3,
and N1.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-3s, which are located and isolated in TU-3. TU-PTR is processed. In the
transmit direction, VC-3s are located precisely and added with TU-PTR. Three TUG-3s
are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The sequence is: TU-3->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT
l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.

6-52 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

l MST and RST


l The functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to connect the
interface conversion module.

Interface converting module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

DC/DC converter module


Through the DC/ DC converting module, different direct currents are provided to each chip on
the board. Two direct currents are provided: +1.8 V and +3.3 V. In addition, protection for +3.3
V power are provided to the board.

6.7.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PD3, there are indicators.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-30 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PD3.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-53


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-30 Front panel of the PD3

PD3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

PD3

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:
l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Interfaces
No interfaces are present on the front panel of the PD3.
The D34S, an electrical interface switching board, provides the E3/T3 interfaces for the PD3.
For details, see the section that describes the D34S.

6.7.5 Valid Slots


The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PD3 board.
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PD3 can be housed in any of slots 12–13, and must be
used with the D34S.
Table 6-29 lists the valid slots for the PD3 and corresponding slots for the D34S.

6-54 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Table 6-29 Valid slots for the PD3 and corresponding slots for the D34S in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack
Valid Slot for the PD3 Corresponding Slot for the D34S

Slot 12 Slot 14

Slot 13 Slot 16

6.7.6 TPS Protection for the Board


The PD3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Protection Principle
For the OptiX OSN 1500B, when used with the D34S and TSB8, the PD3 can be configured
into one 1:1 TPS protection group. Figure 6-31 shows the principle of the TPS protection for
the PD3.

Figure 6-31 Principle of the TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
6 xE3/T3

Switch
control
TSB8 D34S signal

1 1 2
3 2
Cross-
connect
and
timing
board

SLOT 4/5
Protection Working
PD3 PD3
Fail

SLOT12 SLOT13

l Normal state
When the working boards are running normally, the control switch of the D34S is in position
1 and services are directly accessed to the PD3 board.
l Switching state
When the working board detects a fault and requires a switching, the control switch of the
D34S is shifted to position 2 and the control switch of the TSB8 is shifted to a corresponding
position. In this way, the protection board protects the faulty working board.

Hardware Configuration
Table 6-30 lists the slot configuration for the TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-55


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-30 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack

Working Protection Board Slot


Board

PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3) Figure 6-32 shows the slot configuration for
the 1:1TPS protection for the PD3
PD3 (T3) PD3 (T3)

Figure 6-32 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15

Slot 16 D34S
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 20 Slot 12 Protection Slot 7

FAN Slot 13 Working Slot 8


Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

As shown in Figure 6-32, the protection board housed in slot 12 protects the board housed in
slot 13.

Table 6-31 lists the slots for the PD3, D34S and TSB8.

Table 6-31 Slots for the PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

Board Protection Group

PD3 (working) Slot 13

PD3 (protection) Slot 12

TSB8 Slot 14

D34S Slot 16

6.7.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PD3.

You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PD3:

l J1 byte
l C2 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication
l Path service type

6-56 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.7.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PD3 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


The D34S provides electrical interfaces for the PD3. For the specifications of the electrical
interfaces, see the section that describes the D34S.

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PD3 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)


l Weight (kg): 1.1

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N1PD3 is 19 W.

In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the N2PD3 is 12 W.

6.8 PQ3
This section describes the PQ3, a 12 x E3/T3 processing board, in terms of the version, function,
principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.

6.8.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PQ3 board is N2.
6.8.2 Function and Feature
The PQ3 can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and
performance events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.
6.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PQ3 consists the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.
6.8.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the PQ3, there are indicators.
6.8.5 Valid Slots
The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PQ3 board.
6.8.6 TPS Protection for the Board
The PQ3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.8.7 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PQ3.
6.8.8 Technical Specifications

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-57


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

The technical specifications of the PQ3 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.8.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PQ3 board is N2.

6.8.2 Function and Feature


The PQ3 can be used to process E3/T3 signals and the overhead, to report alarms and
performance events, to provide the maintenance feature and the TPS protection.

Table 6-32 lists the functions and features of the PQ3.

Table 6-32 Functions and features of the PQ3

Function and PQ3


Feature

Basic function Processes 12 x E3/T3 signals.

Service Accesses and processes 12 x E3/T3 electrical signals.


processing Supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into E3
services.
Supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1 services into T3
services.

Overhead Supports the setting and query of all path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
processing

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Maintenance Supports inloop and outloop for electrical interfaces.


feature Supports warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the function of querying the manufacturing information of the
board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function.

Protection Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and the
scheme switching board.

6.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PQ3 consists the PPI, E3/T3 mapping/demapping, interface conversion module,
communication and control module and so on.

Figure 6-33 shows the block diagram for the functions of the PQ3.

6-58 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

Figure 6-33 Block diagram for the functions of the PQ3


34 MHz/ Reference clock
155 MHz Cross-connect unit
45 MHz
PLL
OSC

6 x 34 Mbit/s/ High
E3/T3 6 x 45 Mbit/s 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU
E3/T3 Interface
A
P
P mapping/ coversion
I 6 x 34 Mbit/s/ demapping module High
E3/T3 2 x 155 Mbit/s speed bus Cross-connect unit
LIU 6 x 45 Mbit/s
B

LOS Frame header


Communication and Cross-connect unit
Outloop/Inloop control control module Communication
SCC Unit

+3.3 V
DC/DC Fuse -48 V/ -60 V
converter -48 V/ -60 V
+1.8 V DC/DC
converter Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power

OSC: Oscillator PPI: PDH physical interface

Figure 6-34 shows the block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping.

Figure 6-34 Block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping


E3/T3 mapping/demapping

E3/T3
STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
insertion
PDH AIS TU-AIS/TU-LOP
Detector Detector
LPOH(J1/C2/B3)
extraction

E3/T3 STM-1
LPA LPT HPA HPT

LPA: Low order Path Adaptation LPT: Low order Path Termination
HPA: High order Path Adaptation HPT: High order Path Termination

The function modules are described as follows.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-59


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

PPI
l The PPI module mainly consists of line interface units (LIUs). It provides inloop and
outloop function. This module:
l Encodes and decodes signals.
l Recovers data and clock.
l Processes the A_LOS alarm.

E3/T3 mapping/demapping
l LPA
l The 45 Mbit/s (34 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C3 container to be adapted
so as to be transported into the synchronous network.
l LPT
l The virtual container (VC-3) is formatted by lower order path termination (LPT).
l The VC-3 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 us interval (for example,
one STM–1 period), and consists of the VC-3 container and POH. The latter contains nine
octets equally distributed within the frame bytes for VC-3: J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4, F3, K3,
and N1.
l HPA
l HPA generates and processes channel level TU-PTR. In the receive direction, the signals
are split into VC-3s, which are located and isolated in TU-3. TU-PTR is processed. In the
transmit direction, VC-3s are located precisely and added with TU-PTR. Three TUG-3s
are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The sequence is: TU-3->TUG3->VC-4.
l HPT
l The virtual container (VC-4) is formatted. The VC-4 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM–1 period), and consists of the
C4 container and POH.
l MST and RST
l The functions are necessary to create a proprietary STM–1 signal in order to connect the
interface conversion module.

Interface conversion module


The interface converting module mainly converts 622 Mbit/s low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) bus of SDH system into parallel bus. Through this module, the high-rate backplane
interface connects to low-rate interface chip of the transmitting system.

Communication and control module


l Manages and configures other modules of the boards.
l Performs inter-board communication through internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and the standby cross-connect units.
l Selects the clock and frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect units.
l Controls the indicator on the board.

6-60 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

DC/DC converter module


Through the DC/ DC converting module, different direct currents are provided to each chip on
the board. Two direct currents are provided: +1.8 V and +3.3 V. In addition, protection for +3.3
V power are provided to the board.

6.8.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PQ3, there are indicators.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-35 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ3.

Figure 6-35 Front panel of the PQ3

PQ3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

PQ3

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the board:

l Board hardware state indicator (STAT), which is green or red when lit.
l Service activating state indicator (ACT), which is green when lit.
l Board software state indicator (PROG), which is green or red when lit.
l Service alarm indicator (SRV), which is red, green or yellow when lit.

For indication of these indicators, see A Equipment and Board Alarm Indicators.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-61


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the front panel of the PQ3.
The D34S, an electrical interface switching board, provides the E3/T3 interfaces for the PQ3.
For details, see the section that describes the D34S.

6.8.5 Valid Slots


The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the PQ3 board.
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, the PQ3 can be housed in any of slots 12–13, and must be
used with the D34S.
Table 6-33 lists the valid slots for the PQ3 and corresponding slots for the D34S.

Table 6-33 Valid slots for the PQ3 and corresponding slots for the D34S in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack

Valid Slot for the PQ1 Corresponding Slot for the D34S

Slot 12 Slots 14 and 15

Slot 13 Slots 16 and 17

6.8.6 TPS Protection for the Board


The PQ3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Protection Principle
In the OptiX OSN 1500B, used with the D34S and TSB8, the PQ3 can be configured into one
1:1 TPS protection group. Figure 6-36 shows the principle of the TPS protection for the PQ3.

Figure 6-36 Principle of the TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
6 xE3/T3 6 xE3/T3

Switch
TSB8 control
TSB8 D34S D34S signal

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

Cross-
connect
and timing
board

SLOT 4/5
Working
Protection PQ3
PQ3
Fail

SLOT12 SLOT13

6-62 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

l Normal state
When the working boards are running normally, the control switch of the D34S is in position
1 and services are directly accessed to the PQ3 board.
l Switching state
When the working board detects a fault and requires a switching, the control switch of the
D34S is shifted to position 2 and the control switch of the TSB8 is shifted to a corresponding
position. In this way, the protection board protects the faulty working board.

Hardware Configuration
NOTE

Two TSB8 boards are required to configure the TPS protection for the N2PQ3.

Table 6-34 lists the slot configuration for the TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN
1500B subrack.

Table 6-34 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack

Working Protection Board Slot


Board

PQ3 (E3) PQ3 (E3) Figure 6-37 shows the slot configuration for
the 1:3 TPS protection for the PQ3.
PQ3 (T3) PQ3 (T3)

Figure 6-37 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the PQ3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
subrack
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15 TSB8
Slot 16 D34S
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17 D34S
Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 20 Slot 12 Protection Slot 7

FAN Slot 13 Working Slot 8


Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX

As shown in Figure 6-37, the protection board housed in slot 12 protects the board housed in
slot 13.

Table 6-35 lists the slots for the PQ3, D34S and TSB8.

Table 6-35 Slots for the PQ3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

Board Protection Group

PQ3 (working) Slot 13

PQ3 (protection) Slot 12

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-63


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 PDH Processing Boards Hardware Description

Board Protection Group

TSB8 Slots 14–15

D34S Slots 16–17

6.8.7 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the PQ3.
You can use the T2000 to set the following parameters for the PQ3:
l J1 byte
l C2 byte
l Tributary loopback
l Service loading indication
l Path service type

For details on these parameters, see F Board Configuration Reference.

6.8.8 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PQ3 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Electrical Interface Specifications


The D34S provides electrical interfaces for the PQ3. For the specifications of the electrical
interfaces, see the section that describes the D34S.

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the PL1 are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
l Weight (kg): 1.1

Power Consumption
In the normal temperature (25℃), the maximum power consumption of the PQ3 is 13 W.

6.9 DX1
This section describes the DX1, a DDN interface convergence board, in terms of the version,
function, principle, front panel, configuration and specifications.
6.9.1 Version Description
The functional version of the DX1 board is N1.
6.9.2 Function and Feature
The DX1, a DDN interface convergence board, cross-connects 48 x E1 signals at the 64k level
at the system side.

6-64 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 02 (2007-09-10)


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description 6 PDH Processing Boards

6.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The DX1 consists of the interface and frame processing module, encoding/decoding module,
timeslot cross-connect module, framing/deframing module and so on.
6.9.4 Front Panel
On the front panel of the DX1, there are indicators.
6.9.5 Valid Slots
The OptiX OSN 1500A does not support the DX1 board.
6.9.6 Board Feature Code
The code behind the board name in the barcode is the board feature code. The board feature code
of the DX1 indicates the interface impedance type.
6.9.7 TPS Protection for the Board
The DX1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
6.9.8 Board Configuration Reference
You can use the T2000 to set parameters for the DX1.
6.9.9 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the DX1 cover the electrical interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight and power consumption.

6.9.1 Version Description


The functional version of the DX1 board is N1.

6.9.2 Function and Feature


The DX1, a DDN interface convergence board, cross-connects 48 x E1 signals at the 64k level
at the system side.

Table 6-36 lists the functions and features of the DX1.

Table 6-36 Functions and features of the DX1

Function DX1
and
Feature

Basic Processes eight channels of N x 64 kbit/s services and 8 x framed E1 services.


function Cross-connects 48 channels of N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.

Used with Accesses eight channels of N x 64 kbit/s and 8 x framed E1 services and
the interface realizes the 1:N TPS protection when used with the DM12.
board One DX1 board should be used with two DM12 boards.

Alarm and Provides rich alarms and performance events for easy management and
performance maintenance of the equipment.
event

Connector The connectors of the DB28 and DB44 are present on the front panel of the
DM12. The DB28 is for the N x 64 kbit/s signals, and the DB44 is for the
framed E1 signals.

Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-65


OptiX OSN 150